JP2019107358A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing the attention degree to a game and interest in a game to increase a player's desire to play the game.SOLUTION: In a game machine 10, a staying box 39 accommodating a game ball 99 is movable between the upper limit position and the lower limit position in front of a special main display unit 37a. When the staying box 39 is at the upper limit position, a game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is not visible or difficult to view and when the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a is visible. Further, in the game machine 10, when the staying box 39 does not any longer move from the upper limit position, a forced discharge member 319B is operated to restrict game ball entry to the staying box 39, and the game ball 99 is discharged to the back side of a game board 31.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 90

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have a plurality of game setting values that differ in the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot lottery. Also, the game setting value may be suggested to the player by a predetermined effect.

JP, 2000-024234, A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest and interest in the game and to improve the player's willingness to play.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the degree of interest and interest in the game and improving the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game board (31) in which a game area in which game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) which are provided in the gaming area and in which winning balls are paid out by entering the gaming balls,
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls which have not been entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special outlet (363) provided above the gaming area above at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) and for discharging gaming balls to the back side of the gaming board ,
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) as an indicator indicating the payout performance;
Performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed;
Performance information display control means (41) for causing the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information;
View restriction means (39) capable of accommodating the game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) by making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to recognize.
The visual recognition restricting means (39) is controlled on the condition that the gaming ball enters the visual recognition restricting means (39), and at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) Visual recognition state control means (51) which makes visual recognition possible;
Abnormality judging means (51) for judging whether a visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is a visual recognition state of the target performance information;
The first state for allowing the game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) to enter the view restriction means (39), and the above described game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) Switching means (319B) that can be switched between the second state in which entering the ball into the visibility limiting means (39) is limited;
The switching control means (control means) for controlling the switching means (319B) to the second state when it is determined that the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the target visual recognition state by the abnormality judging means (51) 51) and
And the like.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main control apparatus. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main control apparatus. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device. The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main control apparatus. The figure which shows the example of a display on the performance display monitor of a performance information display apparatus. The figure which shows the example of a display in the game setting value display part of a performance information display apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing performed by a main control apparatus. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13; FIG. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a first hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 14; FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed by a main control apparatus. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 16; A flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of data setting processing performed by change game control processing of Drawing 17A. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the change start process performed by the change game control processing of FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process executed in the main process of FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. 16; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16; FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 16; FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine shown in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27; FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 27; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the operation data table which shows the relationship between the operation detection pattern and the operation condition. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 27; FIG. The figure which shows an example of the 1st stop symbol selection table and fluctuation classification table which are used when a change pattern command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. FIG. 32 is a view showing an example of an effect pattern type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 31; FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a pop-out performance suggested image display process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 31; The figure which shows an example of a game setting value suggestion character classification which suggests a game setting value. FIG. 35 is a view showing an example of a game setting value suggesting character selection table used in the processing for displaying the performance of the ball in FIG. 34. FIG. 35 is a view showing an example of a character mode selection table used in the processing for displaying the performance of the ball in FIG. 34; FIG. 35 is a view showing an example of a character mode selection table used in the processing for displaying the performance of the ball in FIG. 34; The figure which shows an example of the ball | bowl performance performance suggestion image displayed on a sub image display part in a fluctuation game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game production decision processing which is executed with the command decision processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening basic presentation selection table used by the opening presentation determination processing performed by the jackpot game presentation determination processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the rank suggestion image classification which suggests the rank of unit jackpot lottery number of times. A figure showing an example of a unit jackpot lottery number suggestion picture selection table used by opening production determination processing. The figure which shows an example of the opening screen in a jackpot game. FIG. 41 is a view showing an example of an ending basic effect selection table and a unit jackpot lottery number suggested image selection table used in the ending effect determination process executed in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40; The figure which shows an example of the ending screen in a big hit game. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode presentation scenario selection table used by the opening / closing execution mode presentation determination processing performed by the big hit game presentation determination processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode presentation scenario selection table used by opening / closing execution mode presentation determination processing. The figure which shows an example of the round game character selection table and unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table which are used by opening and closing execution mode production decision processing. The figure which shows an example of the round game screen of opening / closing execution mode in a big hit game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game production processing which is run with secondary timer interruption processing in Figure 27. The figure which shows the other example of the ball | bowl performance performance suggestion image in a fluctuation game. The figure which shows the other example of the ball | bowl performance performance suggestion image in a fluctuation game. The figure which shows the other example of the round game screen of the opening / closing execution mode in a big hit game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination processing performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a command determination process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of jackpot game production processing. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the round game presentation start process performed by the big hit game production process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the ball | bowl performance performance suggestion image display process performed by the big hit game production process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the ball | bowl performance performance suggestion image display process in the command determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the point table and sum total point rank corresponding | compatible table which are used by the delivery performance suggestion process image display process. FIG. 61 is a view showing an example of a combined point suggesting character selection table to be referred to in the pop-out ball performance suggesting image display process of FIG. 60; The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the ball-outset performance suggestion image display process in the command determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 64 (A) is a view showing an example of the expected value rank correspondence table, and FIG. 64 (B) is a view showing an example of the expected value rank suggestion character selection table used in the ball performance suggestion image display process of FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The front view which expands and shows the principal part of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 66 is a perspective view showing an example of a clone device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 65. 68 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. 67, and FIG. 68 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. FIG. 69 (A) is a front view showing the staying box and its surroundings when the staying box is at the upper limit position, FIG. 69 (B) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 69 (C) is FIG. Sectional drawing in alignment with the X3-X3 cutting plane line of A). FIG. 70 (A) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (B) showing the staying box when the staying box is at the lower limit position and the periphery thereof; FIG. 70 (B) is a staying box when the staying box is at the lower limit position And FIG. 70 (C) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (C) showing the periphery thereof, and FIG. 70 (C) is a sectional view showing the container box and its periphery when the container box is at an intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. FIG. 70 (D) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (C) showing the stay box and its periphery when the stay box is in the middle position. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 65. FIG. 72A is a front view showing an example of a special main display unit, and FIG. 72B is a view showing a display example of the special main display unit. The figure which shows typically the visual recognition state of the special main display part in downward movement level 0-2. 74 (A) and 74 (A) are diagrams schematically showing the visual condition of the special main display part at the downward movement levels 3 and 4, and FIG. 74 (C) is the number of staying gaming balls of the staying box and the staying box The figure which shows the relationship with the lower movement level. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 75; 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a staying box lowering process performed in the command determination process of FIG. 76; FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a staying box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 75; FIG. The front view which shows an example of the Kroon apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention, and its periphery. FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view taken along the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG. 79. FIG. 81 (A) is a perspective view showing an example of the special main display unit and the light transmission monitor, and FIG. 81 (B) shows an example of the relationship between the visual recognition level of the light transmission monitor and the visual recognition state of the special main display. FIG. 81 (C) is a view showing the relationship between the special out-ball count number and the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 82; FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of visual recognition control processing executed in the command determination processing of FIG. 83; FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of light blocking control processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 82; FIG. The figure which shows the other example of the relationship between a visual recognition level and the visual recognition state of a special main display part. FIG. 87 (A) shows an example of the relationship between a plurality of areas and the viewing state of the special main display unit, and FIG. 87 (B) shows another example of the relationship between the viewing level and the viewing state of the special main display unit. Figure showing. The front view which expands and shows the principal part of the gaming machine concerning a 7th embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X5-X5 of FIG. 88; FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 89 when the forced ejection member is in the actuated position; Sectional drawing of the area | region containing the stay box and special main display part in a game machine. 92 (A) and 92 (B) show an example of the relationship between the lower movement level of the staying box and the output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor and the lower limit position detection sensor, and FIG. 92 (C) is a light transmission monitor The visual control state of the special main display part by FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the stay box operation | movement check process performed with a voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of an error process executed in the staying box operation check process of FIG. 94; FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a staying box lowering process performed in the command determination process of FIG. 76; FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a staying box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 75; FIG.

  Hereinafter, first to fourth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are merely specific examples of the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

First Embodiment
First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 51, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described.

[Schematic Configuration of Game Machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front and rear, right and left and upper and lower used in the present embodiment are defined by the front and rear direction D1, the vertical direction D2 and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine provided with a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is an island facility (not shown) of the game hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as, for example, a toroidal gaming machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a jinging ball gaming machine The present invention is applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Furthermore, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 as the left end portion is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper tray 23, a lower tray 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an electric decoration 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 5) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of the pressing operation. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with operation and without operation) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is executed triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by the player in a predetermined specific period in the variable game effect performed in the variable game in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is clearly indicated to the player It is operated to execute operation button effects and the like.

  The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, and may be an arbitrary position of the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate it. Also, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  It is also conceivable that a touch panel may be provided in place of the operation button 20 to display a touch key and receive an operation by the player of the touch key. In addition, the operation button 20 may have a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the variable game effect.

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing the gaming balls from the gaming ball firing mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 sec.

  The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored gaming balls in one row. It is used to lead to the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23, and is used to store gaming balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform sound output presentation for outputting sound. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the electric decoration part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs lamp production by blink modes, such as lighting color and lighting or extinguishing.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In addition, in FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control contents is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the game board 31, an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, an out opening 318. A variable display unit 34 and a main display unit 37 are provided.

  The inner rails 311 and the outer rails 312 are transport paths for delivering the game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that did not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315 or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318 Be done.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 32 includes a launch rail 321, a ball feed device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rails 321 are formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rails 311 and the outer rails 312 of the gaming board 31, and the game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are attached to the inner rails 311 and the outer rails 312. It is what leads. The ball feeding device 322 has drive means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is drive means for causing the gaming ball supplied on the firing rail 321 to be fired toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled according to the operation of the firing handle 22 by the player, and the gaming ball is fired from the gaming ball firing mechanism 32 to the gaming board 31. The game ball launch mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for firing the game ball using another drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, in the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318, an opening penetrating the gaming board 31 in the front-rear direction is formed. ing. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball-incidence sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 5) are provided. In addition, game balls which have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the gaming board 31 as described later. Out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5). The through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 5) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the game ball 31 is hit to the right, the game ball may pass through the through gate 317.

  The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 5) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317 a and out ball sensor 35 are sent to the main control unit 331. It is input. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the game balls according to the detection result of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of the gaming ball by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 35. The number of out balls counted here corresponds to the number of launched game balls launched onto the game board 31 by the game ball launch mechanism 32. The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a and the out ball sensor 35 are, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor, but any sensor capable of individually detecting the ball entry of the game ball by another detection method. May be

  In addition, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric combination 315b for switching the presence or absence of restriction of entering the second winning opening 315 of the gaming ball. The electric role thing 315b is opened and closed by drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, on the game board 31, when the motorized character 315b opens, the game ball can enter the second winning opening 315, and when the motorized character 315b closes, the game ball enters the second winning opening 315. The sphere is limited.

  Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an open / close door 316 b for switching the presence or absence of restriction of entering the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The open / close door 316 b is opened and closed by drive means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening and closing door 316b enables the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening and closing door 316b closes the game ball entering the variable winning opening 316. Ru.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the ball entry sensor 314a or the ball entry sensor 315a detects the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. For example, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the variable winning opening 316 is entered The number of winning balls in the case is 13 balls. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed in the main control unit 331 is a big hit, it shifts to the big hit gaming state (special game state), and the below-mentioned round game (unit game) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times, 16 times), it is possible to expect a large amount of prize balls to be paid out.

  In addition, when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is winning, the game is shifted to a predetermined jackpot gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes the 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and the 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot gaming state is 5 round games (unit game) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time has elapsed or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) or more of game balls have won in the variable winning opening 316. It is a gaming state including the open / close execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variation big hit gaming state is a gaming state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and it can be expected to pay out more prize balls than the 5R jackpot gaming state, than the 5R jackpot gaming state It is a game state advantageous to the player.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display portion 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display portion 341, the symbol variation display and the variation game according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the entry to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 Various displays such as presentation effects are performed. In addition, the symbol display part 341 is an example of the image display means of this invention. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display portion 341 is performed by, for example, sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols with numerals “1” to “9” in the longitudinal direction, the lateral direction, the oblique direction, and the like. In addition, other characters or sub-patterns such as a pattern may be displayed between the main patterns. Further, in the present embodiment, there is no sub symbol, and the types of main symbols are nine types of “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variation game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the lapse of the variation display time set in advance from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display portion 341 . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols vary along the preset variation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and the variations of the plurality of main symbols stop in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time passes, the symbol variation display is ended.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is finished, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged in one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", the main symbol of the same symbol is displayed in the effective line, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot Be done. In addition, the jackpot type may be clearly indicated by the combination of the main symbols in the effective line, but it is not necessarily clear. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777", for example, is set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols. Is displayed, or the combination of the same symbols other than "777" is displayed in a line of effective lines. Moreover, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit", a state where symbol combinations such as "333" set in advance as symbol combinations showing the 5R probability variation big hit among the main symbols are arranged is displayed. The same symbol combination other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpots or 5R probability variation jackpots such as “777” or “333” is displayed in the effective line. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, among the main symbols, it is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot, for example, other than a combination of symbols indicating a definite variation jackpot such as “222” or “444”. The state where the combination of the same pattern is lined up by the effective line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, a state (for example, “323” or “723” or the like) in which combinations of different main symbols are arranged in the effective line is displayed.

  Further, on the symbol display portion 341, in addition to the variable display of the main symbol in the variable game, the variable game effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is displayed. In addition, when the state where the jackpot symbol combination other than the combination of the main symbols showing the 16R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the active line is displayed when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, 5R probability variation jackpot as a variation game effect Or 5R indication suggestion is suggested to indicate that it is usually a jackpot. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the jackpot symbol combination other than the combination of the main symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot is displayed when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the 5R normal jackpot as a variation game effect is displayed. Suggestive rendition to indicate that is performed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is the 5R probability variation jackpot is executed.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state shifts to a big hit gaming state, a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an open / close execution mode effect, and an ending effect is displayed on the symbol display portion 341.

  A sub-image display unit 38 such as a liquid crystal display is provided in the left side area on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. In the sub image display unit 38, game effects are executed together with the symbol display unit 341 in the variable game and the big hit game. Further, in the sub-image display unit 38, an effect is suggested that suggests the player information (performance information) related to the out-dump performance in the variable game and the big hit game. Although the details of the performance information will be described later, the performance information includes, for example, a game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, continuous role ratio information, role ratio information, and the like. The sub image display unit 38 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  It is also conceivable to provide the game board 31 with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. In this way, when an action is made to cause the game ball to be guided to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning hole 316 unfairly using a magnet, it is possible to detect the unfair action. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. In this way, when an act is performed in which a radio wave is input to the ball entry sensor 314a, 315a illegally to cause the game ball to be falsely detected, it is possible to detect the fraud. The radio wave sensor can detect, for example, radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

  The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two seven-segment displays 372, 373 and an LED group 374 arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. The LED pair 371 is triggered by a winning on the through gate 317, and the result of the lottery as to whether or not to open the motorized part 315b in the main control unit 331 is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern). In the 7-segment display 372, the variable display of symbols is performed triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. In the 7-segment display 373, the variable display of symbols is performed triggered by the winning of the second winning opening 315, and the symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the main control unit 331 are stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the number N of pending displays and the number M of pending variable displays generated by winning on the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 are displayed by the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. When the gaming balls in the upper tray 23 are saturated, the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a emission control device 8, and a power control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of payout balls of the gaming ball by the payout device 132, and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 5, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to the jackpot gaming state set in advance. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of a main control unit of the present invention. Further, the MPU 41 incorporates a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Also, part or all of the processing performed by the main control device 4 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the main display unit 37, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the through gate 317 are entered based on the detection signals from the entering sensors 313a to 317a. To judge. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 35. Further, to the input / output I / F 42, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the emission control device 8, the power control device 9, etc. are connected.

  Then, the MPU 41 instructs the voice lamp control device 5 to change pattern command, first hold command, second hold command, shift command, jackpot start command, round game start command, ending start command, jackpot game end command, game setting value. A command such as a change command or a unit jackpot lottery number update command is output.

  The fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the fluctuation display time and the lottery result in the big hit lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the big lottery is the big hit. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later based on the information stored in the suspension storage area 412b described later when the symbol display by the main display unit 37 is started. Ru. The variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command are the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold, the variation pattern, and the hold pattern N when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when there is an increase in the hold number N or the hold number M (FIG. 15 of FIG. Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process).

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 when the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the pass / fail information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 18 described later.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and when transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, FIG. It is set in the game state transition process in the main process of. Also, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, the voice lamp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, you can also know that the opening will be started. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice lamp control device 5 may be made to know that the opening is started by the opening start command.

  The round game start command is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the round number of the round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game. , It is set in the jackpot game control processing in the main processing of FIG. 16 described later. In the voice lamp control device 5, it can be understood that the opening is ended and the opening / closing execution mode is started by the round game start command, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, Alternatively, the open / close execution mode start command may be set when the open / close execution mode is started. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

  The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 16 described later.

  The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and step S1710 in the game setting value change processing of FIG. 20 described later. It is set in.

  The unit jackpot lottery number update command is to the first winning opening 314 per a fixed number of minus balls (for example, minus 250 balls) in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). It is a command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 of the number of times the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 was executed (the number of times the jackpot lottery was received) upon winning a prize. It is updated in step S1805 in the performance information update process.

  In addition, although commands other than the above-mentioned command may be output to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 5 from the main control apparatus 4, those description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition, an oscillation circuit, a frequency divider circuit, and the like are also mounted on the main control device 4 as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency that has been determined in advance, and the divider circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process described later executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the divider circuit.

  In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the main timer division described later is generated each time the MPU 41 generates a rise (or fall) of the clock signal. It is assumed that the loading process is activated and executed. The oscillation circuit and the divider circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock of the control subject in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Also, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used to set a command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery and the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery and the setting of the fluctuation display time, etc., using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the suspension storage area 412b and the electric power suspension area 412c of the RAM 412.

  In the lottery counter 412a, there are a big hit random number counter C1 used for big hit winning lottery, a big hit type counter C2 used when determining a big hit type, and a reach random number counter C3 used when determining an out type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 that determines the fluctuation display time in the main display portion 37 and the symbol display portion 341. Be Further, the random number counter C4 used in the lottery for whether or not the motorized combination 315b of the second winning opening 315 is set to the electronic combination release state and the initial value setting of the normal random number counter C4 in the lottery counter 412a. And an initial value counter CIN2 used for Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1 are added to the previous value by 1 at short intervals by the MPU 41 and used as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2 and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 at the time of setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display time.

  The pending storage area 412b includes a first pending storage area REA, a second pending storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserve storage area REA includes a first reserve area REA1, a second reserve area REA2, a third reserve area REA3, a fourth reserve area REA4, and a reserve count storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first suspension storage area REA, and the type of the variable game displayed by the 7-segment display 372 as the variable display and the stop display may be referred to as a first special symbol game is there. The second reserve storage area REB includes a first reserve area REB1, a second reserve area REB2, a third reserve area REB3, a fourth reserve area REB4, and a reserve count storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserve storage area REB, and the type of the change game in which the 7-segment display 373 performs the change display and the stop display may be referred to as a second special symbol game is there.

  When the game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a big hit It is acquired as the success or failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first hold storage area REA. When the game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a big hit It is acquired as the success or failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the second reserve storage area REB. Acquisition processing of the success or failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination means of the present invention by executing the processing according to the control program. A lottery counter 412a (such as a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a change type counter CS1) is individually provided for each of the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. May be provided.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in any one of the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the REA 4 and the second reserve storage area REB.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery for the change game executed based on the information on the acceptance or rejection stored in the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 and the second reserve storage area REB. In addition to the result of the lottery, it is possible to judge in advance the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol fluctuation display displayed on the symbol display portion 341.

  Specifically, when the game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the acceptance information is free in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3 and the fourth holding area REA4. Stored in the The number of holdings of the pass / fail information among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 is stored as the holding number N in the number-of-holdings storage area NAA.

  In addition, when the game ball enters the 2nd winning a prize opening 315, the pass / fail information is vacant with priority of 1st reserve area REB1, 2nd reserve area REB2, 3rd reserve area REB3, and 4 reserve area REB4. It is stored in the area. In the number-of-holdings storage area NAB, the number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 in which the pass / fail information is stored is stored as the number of holdings M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning opening 314 is provided with a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. In addition, it is possible to hold up to four pieces of success or failure information as a winning history to the second winning opening 315 respectively.

  In addition, it is also considered as another embodiment that a holding area with a maximum number of holdings of 8 is provided in common to the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, and even in this case up to a maximum of eight. It is possible to hold the pass / fail information as the winning history. Storage processing of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing processing according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA or the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB when the symbol variation display in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. Storage area used to move the pass / fail information stored in Specifically, the priority information of the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the information does not exist in the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB. When the number-of-retentions storage area NAB is 0, the pass / fail information of the first reserve area REA1 of the first reserve storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  The difference between the number of reservations M stored in the number of storage area NAA of the first storage area REA and the number N of storage areas stored in the number of storage area NAB of the second storage area REB is 2 or more In this case, it may be considered as another embodiment that the value of the larger number of holding areas is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. It is also conceivable as another embodiment that the pass / fail information of the first reserve area REA1 of the first reserve storage area REA and the first reserve area REB1 of the second reserve storage area REB is alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  And MPU41 performs a big hit lottery etc. based on the numerical information memorized as success or failure information in execution area AE at the start of one change game. At this time, when the first reserve area REA1 of the first reserve storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second reserve area REA2 is shifted to the first reserve area REA1, and the third reserve area REA1 The pass / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 is shifted to the second hold area REA2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 is shifted to the third hold area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first reserve area REB1 of the second reserve storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second reserve area REB2 is shifted to the first reserve area REB1, and the third reserve area REB1 The pass / fail information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reserve area REB2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth reserve area REB4 is shifted to the third reserve area REB3.

  For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the big hit random number counter C1 makes one turn, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the large hitting random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at a timing when the gaming ball has won the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  Two types of values of random numbers for winning a big hit are set corresponding to the high probability mode which is the low probability mode and the probability variation gaming state, by the success or failure table stored in the hit / not table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an example of the high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 7 (A) and 7 (B), the probability (big hit probability) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is the game setting value as the low probability mode hit / fail table and the high probability mode hit / not table. A plurality of different success or failure tables are provided accordingly. The low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table include four success / failure tables corresponding to the four game setting values 1 to 4, respectively. In the order of the game setting value 4, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2 and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

  In the game setting value 1, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the big win among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535 is 206 (0 to 205) high for the low probability mode success / failure table, high The probability mode pass / fail table is 824 (0 to 823). That is, in the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability of the low probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high probability mode is about 4 times that of the low probability mode, about 1/79. 5 (824/65536).

  In the game setting value 2, out of the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random values for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the big win is 213 (0 to 212) high for the low probability mode success / failure table, The probability mode pass / fail table is 852 (0 to 851). That is, in the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability of the low probability mode is about 1 / 307.7 (213/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high probability mode is about 4 times that of the low probability mode, about 1/76. 9 (852/65536).

  In the game setting value 3, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the big win among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535 is 220 (0 to 219) high for the low probability mode success / failure table, The probability mode pass / fail table is 880 (0 to 879). That is, in the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability of the low probability mode is about 1 / 297.9 (220/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high probability mode is about 4 times that of the low probability mode, about 1/74. 5 (880/65536).

  In the game setting value 4, the number of random number values for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the big win among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535 is 227 (0 to 226) for the low probability mode success / failure table, high The probability mode pass / fail table is 908 (0-907). That is, in the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability of the low probability mode is about 1 / 288.7 (227/65536), and the jackpot probability of the high probability mode is about 4 times that of the low probability mode, about 1/72. 2 (908/65536).

  When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out.

  Here, in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, it is considered that random numbers in which the lottery results in the big hit lottery of the same game setting values are the big win are common but random numbers that are the big win are not common. Be In addition, the random number for winning a jackpot may not be a continuous value, but may be a value in which part or all is discrete.

  Further, although the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table are provided four by four in accordance with the game setting, there may be at least one success / failure table for each mode. That is, the game setting is not limited to four stages. Further, it is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low probability mode success / failure tables corresponding to a plurality of stages of game setting, while providing one high probability mode success / failure table. That is, it is also conceivable to provide a plurality of settings for the low probability mode, and not to provide a gradual game setting for the high probability mode, to make the jackpot probability uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be uniform, and multi-level game settings may be provided for the high probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19 and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball has won the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area in the ROM 411 sets the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types of the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 7C, in the case where the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by the winning on the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers that will be 5R probability variation jackpots is 10 to 9 10 The number of random numbers to be 16R probability variation jackpots is 5 to 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be 5R normal jackpots is 5 to 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by the winning of the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers to be 5R probability variation jackpot is 0 to 4 and 16R probability variation jackpot and The number of random numbers is 10 of 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be a 5R normal jackpot is 5 of 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability variation machine in which the probability of the probability variation jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol. That is, in the probability variation gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), compared with the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode) Expected acquisition value of the game ball when the lottery result in the lottery becomes a big hit is set high.

  In the present embodiment, the first winning opening 314 is an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315 is an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game by winning. The minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 the game ball has won, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same in the game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability machine, and may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a single type two-mixer machine, or the like.

  Then, based on the values of the big hit random number counter C1 and the big hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 has a lottery result in the big hit lottery “5R probability variation big hit”, “16R probability variation big hit”, “5R normal It is determined which of the "big hit" and the "out".

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of 5R probability variation big hit or 16R probability variation big hit, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state which is high probability mode where winning probability of the big hit is high after the end of the big hit game and high frequency support mode where opening probability of the electric character 315b is high. Then, in the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, transition to the short game state is a low probability mode in which the jackpot probability of winning is low after the end of the jackpot game and a high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the motorized jack 315b is high. And, in this embodiment, in the short time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), the player is notified of the lottery result of the jackpot of the prescribed number of times set in advance, such as 50 times and 100 times. The process is terminated when the player continues that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot before the specified number of times elapses.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as a ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability machine, the jackpot of a prescribed number of times (for example, 50 times or 100 times) set in advance after the end of the jackpot game at the time of probability variation jackpot When the lottery is executed in the probability variation gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the big hit lottery does not become a big hit by the specified number of times, the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency Switch to support mode) and exit the frequent support mode. In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment to perform a fall lottery from the probability variation gaming state to the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state in the fluctuation game. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, it is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state and the time saving gaming state. In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 will be described by way of an example in which the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R probability variation, 16R probability variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpots, 16R regular jackpots.

  Further, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball has won the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display portion 341 when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out. Specifically, the out-of-classification table stored in the out-of-classification table storage area in the ROM 411 causes the last stop symbol to be shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and to stop after the reach occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of out-of-reach except reach and out-of-front out which the final stop symbol stops except in front and behind of the reach symbol and reach which does not occur.

  Here, FIG. 7D is a diagram showing an example of the outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 7 (D), the values of the random numbers for reaching back and forth are 0 to 8, the values for random numbers for reaching other than back and forth are 9 to 38, and the value of random numbers for completely out is 39 ~ 238. The MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game in which a 5R probability variation jackpot, a 16R probability variation jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, ie, a variation game transitioning to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, "reach" indicates a state in which it is likely to become a symbol combination of main symbols indicating that a jackpot has been won between the start of variation display of symbols in symbol display portion 341 and the stop display of symbols. Is a fluctuating condition. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line in the symbol display portion 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is in a state of variation. In addition, during the fluctuation state of reach in the symbol display section 341, a movie such as a predetermined character is displayed to suggest an expectation, a story effect process that suggests an expectation, or a game in which the player's operation on the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect The participatory operation effect processing and the like are executed. In addition, during execution of these rendering processes, it is also conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display section 341 becomes non-display, and that the variable display is displayed by being reduced or enlarged.

  For example, the motor-operated workpiece release counter C4 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the hold combination area 412c of the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether the electric combination 315b is opened for a predetermined time according to the value of the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the combination holding area 412c. For example, it can be considered that the winning is obtained when the motorized product release counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the motor is released when the motorized product release counter C4 is 200 to 250.

  For example, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed in the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. As described above, by determining the change pattern type, the voice lamp control device 5 performs rough change game effects such as high-speed change effects (basic effects, non-reach effects), normal reach effects, super reach effects, special reach effects, etc. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once by the MPU 41 every time the main process described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the gaming ball has won the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table set in advance. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of fluctuation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability fluctuation jackpot fluctuation table, or the deviation fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be separately provided for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 8 (A), FIG. 8 (B) and FIG. 8 (C) are figures which show an example of a usual big hit variation table, a probability variation big hit variation table, and a deviation variation table. As shown in FIGS. 8 (A), 8 (B) and 8 (C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table and the outlier fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is previously determined according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is associated. And MPU41, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", the normal jackpot variation table, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery If the result is "out", the out-of-variation table is referred to, and the type of fluctuation pattern is specified.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. One of the two is selected. Here, when the fluctuation pattern "01" is selected, a normal reach effect pattern in which the fluctuation display time is 30s is determined as the fluctuation type (rendering pattern type) in the voice lamp control device 5, and the normal reach effect pattern in the symbol display portion 341 Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect. When the fluctuation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern having a fluctuation display time of 60 seconds as the fluctuation type (rendering pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 performs super reach effect The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the fluctuation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a special reach effect pattern having 90 seconds, which is the longest variable display time, as the fluctuation type (rendering pattern). An effect pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, in the outlier fluctuation table, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected for each stop type (reach before and after reach, reach other than back and forth, complete exit) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between the and the fluctuation patterns is defined. More specifically, in the case where the stop type at the time of removal is a reach other than the front-rear outreach or the front-back out-of-front, any of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the type of stop at the time of out is completely out, either of the change patterns “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the change type counter CS1. When the fluctuation pattern "04" is selected, the reach no effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having a fluctuation display time of 7 seconds is determined as the fluctuation type (effect pattern type) in the voice lamp control device 5, and symbol display A non-reach effect pattern is executed in section 341 (see FIG. 27). Further, when the fluctuation pattern "05" is selected, the reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the fluctuation display time is 10s is determined as the fluctuation type (rendering pattern type) in the voice lamp control device 5 and symbol display In part 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the variable display at the time of disconnection corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "04", the fluctuation display is out without accompanying the notice effect such as a character, a message, etc. Is executed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as the fluctuation display at the time of movement corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "05", the fluctuation display is out with the notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, etc. To be executed. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected may be executed as a notice effect.

  The type of fluctuation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 8 (A), 8 (B) and 8 (C). In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be separately provided for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects different in character, story, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", and any one of them is selected. A normal reach effect is executed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach effect to be executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", a plurality of types of super reach effects different in character, story, etc. are prepared, and it is selected from among them One of the super reach effects performed is performed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than normal reach production, and the probability (expected degree) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big win than the normal reach production is high, and a big hit is elected than the special reach production It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (the degree of expectation) is low.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach effect executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach effects different in character, story, etc. are prepared, and it is possible to select from among them Any of the special reach effects that have been The special reach effect is a reach effect whose fluctuation time is longer than that of the normal reach effect, and is an effect that develops from, for example, the normal reach effect or the super reach effect. Special reach production is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expected degree) of winning a big hit is higher than that of normal reach production or special reach production.

  In the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation situation on the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a one-time operation effect in which the one-shot operation is reflected in the effect, of the operation button 20 by the player A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the continuous hit operation is reflected in the effect, and a long press operation effect in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

  Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is Input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 changes pattern command “A” indicating “5R normal jackpot” preceded with the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. One of A01 "to" A03 "is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 has a variation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot before the variation patterns “01” to “03”. -Output one of "B03". Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 has a variation pattern command “C01” attached with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot before the variation patterns “01” to “03”. Output one of "C03". Further, when the lottery result is "off", the MPU 41 changes pattern commands "D01" to "D05" with "D" indicating that it is out of the movement patterns "01" to "05". Output one of the Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display portion 341 is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the fluctuation mode, such as the fluctuation type and the effect type, displayed in are determined. Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 to perform variable display on the basis of the determined details of the change mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights the electric decoration 27 and blinks. Or turn it off.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table for the fluctuation display in the symbol display portion 341. It will run. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. In addition, since the details of the fluctuation mode actually displayed on the symbol display portion 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various fluctuation modes as the fluctuation mode.

  Here, FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412 d stores game information related to the game history, the game performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as the game information, "the number of out balls," "the number of general winning opening payouts," "the number of first winning openings payout balls," "the number of second winning openings payout balls , "Variable winning a prize payout number", "game setting value", "base information", "continuous role ratio information", "role ratio information", "cumulative jackpot lottery number", "unit jackpot lottery number , "The number of big hits", and "the number of consecutive outs" are stored. Among these game information, "game setting value", "base information", "continuous role ratio information", "role ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery number of times" Information).

  The “number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). This "number of out-of-balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting out-out balls detected by the out-of-ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG.

  The “general winning a prize payout number of balls” is an integrated value of gaming balls paid out for winning in the general winning opening 313 in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). The "general winning opening payout number of balls" is the winning ball command setting of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 16 to be described later when the winning sensor 313a detects a winning in the general winning opening 313 in the normal gaming state. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the general winning opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by the present prize. .

  The “first winning opening payout number of balls” is an integrated value of gaming balls to be paid out for winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). . This “first winning a prize opening payout number of balls” is a winning ball in step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 16 to be described later when the winning sensor 314a detects a winning in the first winning port 314 in the normal gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls according to the winning on the first winning opening 314 in the command setting process. Update to

  The “second winning opening payout number of balls” is an integrated value of gaming balls to be paid out for winning in the second winning opening 315 in the short time game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) . This "second winning a prize opening payout number of balls" is a winning ball in step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 16 described later, when a winning to the second winning opening 315 is detected by the ball entry sensor 315a in the short time game state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls according to the winning on the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process. Update to

  “Variable winning a prize payout number of balls” is an integrated value of gaming balls paid out for winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "variable winning opening payout number of balls" is the winning ball command setting of step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. 16 described later, when a winning to the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensor 316a in the big hit gaming state When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the variable winning opening 316 in the processing, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by the present prize. .

  In addition, "the number of out balls", "the number of general winning a prize winnings out balls", "the number of the first winning a prize winning balls", the "the number of second winning a prize balls out" and "the number of variable winning a prize balls out" If the “number of out-of-balls” reaches 60000 in the specific performance information update process of 21 (step S1806: Yes), it is cleared to 0 (step S1810).

  The “game setting value” is used to select a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) used in the jackpot lottery (judgment determination). . In other words, the “game setting value” defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, as described later, four stages of game setting (four types of low probability mode success / failure tables (see FIG. 7A) and high probability mode success / failure tables (see FIG. 7B) different in jackpot probability) Are prepared. The “game setting value” is updated in a game setting value change process of FIG. 20 described later.

  The "base information" is information on the "base" which is a payout rate (outgoing ball rate) in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode), and this "base" is the normal gaming state It is a ratio of the number of total paid-out balls of the "general winning a prize opening payout ball number" and the "first winning a prize opening payout ball number" to "the number of out balls" in. If "base" is expressed by a formula, "base" = 100 × ("general winning opening amount of payout balls" + "first winning number of opening payout balls") / "out number of balls". The “base information” includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1 and the second-preceding 60,000-ball base B2. Here, the last 60,000-ball base B1 and the second-preceding 60,000-ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out-balls reaches 60000 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later (steps S1807 and S1808). Specifically, the “base” when the number of latest out-of-the-balls reaches 60000 is the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the “base” when the number of the last out-of-the-balls reaches 60000 is the last It is stored as "base information" of the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as the 60,000-ball base B2 before the previous time. Further, until the counter value of the out ball number reaches 60000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S 1803), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” of the game information storage area of the RAM 412.

  In the present embodiment, the “base information” includes “current base BL”, “previous 60,000 ball base B1” and “previous 60,000 ball base B2”, and the past two 60,000 ball bases have a history Although it is left as it is, you may make it leave the past 6 times more than 60,000 ball bases as a history. In addition, as the “base information”, a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present may be included.

  "Continuous role ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by the winnings to all winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) with payouts of winning balls. In the above, it is information on the "continuous character ratio", which is the ratio of the variable winning a prize payout number. “Continuous role ratio” is expressed by a formula as follows: “continuous role ratio” = 100 × “variable winning opening number of payout balls” / “total payout number of balls”. The “continuous role ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous character ratio information" is stored as a cumulative continuous character ratio until the present from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In addition, the "continuous role ratio information" is a period until a fixed jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in a normal gaming state is executed for a fixed period (for example, for a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times)) , It may be a continuous character ratio with respect to a period until the number of out-of-balls reaches a fixed number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, "continuous character ratio information" may include both a cumulative continuous character ratio and a continuous character ratio in a fixed number of periods.

  “Property ratio information” is the total number of paid-out balls by the winnings to all winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315, and variable winning opening 316) with payout of winning balls. It is information on a "feature ratio" which is a ratio of the total number of payouts of the second winning opening and the number of variable winning openings. The “character ratio” is expressed by a formula: “character ratio” = 100 × (“the number of second winning opening payout balls” + “the number of variable winning opening payout balls”) / “total number of payout balls”. The “parts ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the "feature ratio information" is stored as a cumulative feature ratio from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present time. Note that the "item ratio information" is for a fixed period (for example, for a fixed number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a fixed jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in the normal gaming state, It may be an item ratio with respect to a period until the number of out-of-balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, "continuous character ratio information" may include both a cumulative character ratio and a character ratio in a fixed number of periods.

  The "cumulative big hit lottery number" is in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode) from the start of activation of the gaming machine 10 before the start of the operation of the gaming hall until the present. It is the number of times the jackpot lottery was done. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is also the cumulative fluctuation display frequency at which the symbol fluctuation display of the seven-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. is there. The “cumulative jackpot lottery number” is incremented by one each time the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 19 described later. The “cumulative jackpot lottery number” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned off.

  The “unit jackpot lottery number” is a jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314 per fixed number of minus balls in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). It is the number of times received (the number of times that the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is “250 balls”, and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting “the number of general winning opening payout balls” and the “first winning hole payout balls” from the “number of out balls”. In other words, "unit jackpot lottery number of times" is the number of symbol fluctuation display (number of times the jackpot lottery has been received) of the 7 segment indicator 372 on average of 1000 yen when receiving a bonus ball of 250 balls for 1000 yen in the game hall. is there. The “unit jackpot lottery number” may be the number of times the jackpot lottery per fixed number “out ball number” in the normal gaming state is received. The “unit jackpot lottery number” is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21 described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery number of times” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number of times since the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall until the present. In addition, "the unit jackpot lottery number of times" is a period until a certain number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) in the normal gaming state is executed for a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times)) It may be for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "unit jackpot lottery number", both of the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number and the unit jackpot lottery number in a fixed number of periods may be stored as game information.

  The “number of jackpots” is the number of times the lottery result in the jackpot lottery made from the start of activation of the gaming machine 10 before the start of the operation of the gaming hall becomes the jackpot. The “big hit number” is incremented by one each time the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition processing executed in step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 16 described later. Also, “the number of times of big hit” is cleared from the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the game machine 10 is turned off.

  The “number of consecutive out-of-orders” is the number of times the lottery result in the big hit lottery has been continuously out in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode), and the lottery result is a big hit In case it is cleared to 0 times. The “number of continuous out-of-orders” is the result of the success / failure determination based on the low probability mode success / failure table in step S1603 when starting symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. If the result is out of order, 1 is added at a time, and it is cleared to 0 when the result of the pass / fail judgment is a big hit. In the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive disconnections” is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive disconnections" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power of the gaming machine 10.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 5, the performance information display device 4A displays the "base information" and the "game setting value" stored as gaming information (performance information) in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. is there. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game setting value display unit 45, a setting value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 10 is a view schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the performance display monitor 43 displays “base information” in the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a visible position in the state where the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is constituted by a plurality (four in the present embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as 4-digit 7-segment. In addition, although it is preferable to provide the performance display monitor 43 in the main control device 4, it may be provided in apparatuses other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331 May be provided. It is also conceivable to display "base information" using the two 7-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display unit 37.

  The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display the numbers “0” to “9” and the alphabet “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when the alphabet "B" is displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the numeral "8" and displayed as "8." and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the numeral "0" and "0." is displayed. Moreover, when displaying any alphabet of the alphabet of "A"-"F", it is also possible to make a dot light only in order to show that it is an alphabet clearly.

  The performance display monitor 43 is an identification segment in which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are displayed as “base type” in abbreviated symbols, and the two right 7-segments The indicators 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, “BL”, which is an abbreviation of the current base BL, is “8.”, “L” in the left two 7-segment displays 431, 432 which are identification segments. The base value “31” is displayed as “3” and “1” in the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 that are ratio segments. That is, in the four seven-segment displays 431 to 434, "8.", "L", "3", and "1" are displayed in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 switches on and off of the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) at the same time by pressing operation. Provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized and display of base information on the performance display monitor 43 is enabled. On the other hand, when an operation to turn off the power is performed on the performance display switch 44, the energization to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed. . The performance display switch 44 may be provided other than the main control device 4.

  Here, FIG. 11 is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are in the off state, and the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 11 (B) to 11 (D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, as the “base information”, the current base BL → last time 60,000 unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. The loops are sequentially looped from the ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base B2 to the current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals. The example shown in FIG. 11B shows that the current base BL is 28%, and the example shown in FIG. 11C shows that the 60,000-ball base B1 last time is 34%, and FIG. In the example shown in Fig. 6, it is shown that the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% before the previous time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are extinguished, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

  In addition, a program necessary for displaying "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the last 60,000 ball base B2, the performance display monitor 43 A program for displaying the BL, the last 60,000 ball base B1 and the last 60,000 ball base B2 sequentially at predetermined intervals is stored in the ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main control device 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, when there is a capacity margin in the ROM 411 of the MPU 41, a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. Further, a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

  Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of or in addition to the "base information", the game information is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous role ratio information" or "role ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by a display of another form such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or the like.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 10, the game setting value display unit 45 selects the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) and the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) to be referred to in the jackpot lottery. The above-mentioned game setting value for the purpose of displaying is displayed, and it is constituted by 7 segment indicator. The game setting value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured with a display of another form such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, etc. Game setting values may be displayed.

  The setting value change operation unit 46 switches on / off of the power of the 7-segment display by the pressing operation, and enables the change of the game setting value by being rotated when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The set value change operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact type switch turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch whose contact is switched by a rotation operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 12 is a view showing a display example on the game setting value display unit 45 of the main control device.

  As shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the pressing operation is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46 when the game setting value display unit 45 is in the extinguished state, the 7 segment indicator is energized to set the game setting value. A number is displayed on the display unit 45. The numbers displayed at this time are game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 and indicate the current game setting values. In the illustrated example, the game setting value is "1". On the other hand, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed when the game setting value display unit 45 is in the lighting state, the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off by interrupting the energization of the 7-segment display. It becomes a state.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated when the game setting value display unit 45 is in the on state, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed. Be done. In the illustrated example, when the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated to the right, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is increased, and the game setting value display unit 45 is rotated to the left. The number displayed on the unit 45 is reduced. Then, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the game setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as a game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Ru. Therefore, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed in a state where the number corresponding to the target game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, the power is turned off when the power of the 7-segment display is turned off. The number displayed immediately before turning off is determined as the game setting value. Thus, the MPU 41 selects the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) or the high probability mode success / failure table (FIG. 7B) selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Can make a big hit lottery based on

  The method of changing the game setting value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. For example, a method of determining a game setting value by pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) after rotating the setting value change operation unit 46, continuously hitting or pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) The method to turn off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, inserting the key into the key hole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key Alternatively, the key may be removed after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control unit 332 includes the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol variation display in the symbol display portion 341 Execute effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 incorporates a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used for fluctuating game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like, and lamp blink patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The voice lamp control device 5 causes the MPU 51 to execute a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511, whereby a command is sent to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display section 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electric decoration 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the variable game effect and the big hit game effect described later.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control unit 4 to the voice lamp control unit 5. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command and the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  Further, the speaker 26 and the electric decoration 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination portion 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, the operation switch 20 a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the sound are output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control a sound output effect, a lamp effect by the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

  Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 changes the fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of the main symbol (refer to FIG. 32A)), fluctuation display time, fluctuation type (FIG. 32) based on the fluctuation pattern command. (See (B)) and the effect pattern type (see (A) to (C) in FIG. 33), and transmit a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (FIG. 31). (Refer to step S23057 in the command determination processing in step S230), and starts the symbol variation display in the symbol display section 341. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed when the fluctuation pattern command indicates the deviation. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 executes a pop-out performance suggestion image display process to cause the sub image display unit 38 to display a pop-out performance suggestion image suggesting pop-out performance.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Note that bi-directional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 incorporates a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also incorporates other circuits such as a timer circuit that counts time and an interrupt circuit that receives an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes processing in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. In addition, part or all of the processing performed by the display control device 6 may be performed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, a plurality of types of images are stored, such as variation symbols such as main symbols used in symbol variation display of the symbol display portion 341, notice effect image, reach effect image, big hit effect image, and off effect image ing. The image displayed on the symbol display portion 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes, in addition to the type and timing of the image to be used, the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation pattern. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays an image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol change display and the effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 incorporates a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the gaming balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a driving unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stopper for switching the presence or absence of the gaming balls. And a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the gaming balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of gaming balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state recovery switch 73. The state recovery switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed on an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount of money within the range of the amount of money and to lend it to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to the effect that a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71, and the predetermined number of gaming balls are displayed. Be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Projection control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the gaming ball firing mechanism 32 while the firing handle 22 is being rotated, so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 are fired the rail 321 Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 to the game board 31 Launch it. At this time, the emission control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched on / off in a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the discharge handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is inputted to the discharge control IC 81 in accordance with the amount of rotational operation of the discharge handle 22. As a result, the firing control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the gaming ball from the gaming ball firing mechanism 32 as the rotation manipulation amount of the firing handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation manipulation amount of the firing handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted to be strong.

  Further, the release handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the release handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to optionally stop the release of the game ball. Is provided. When the release control IC 81 detects that the player does not touch the release handle 22 with the touch sensor 21a using the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player When it is detected, the game ball launch mechanism 32 stops the launch of the game ball. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotating state, and a game is prevented in a situation where the player does not touch the launch handle 22. Also, the player can stop the firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control unit 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12 V voltage for driving various sensors, drivers and the like, +5 V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12 V or +5 V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the emission control device 8, and the like.

  The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erase switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 91 ON.

  Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means to be charged by the power supplied from the power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Furthermore, the power control unit 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control unit 4, the voice lamp control unit 5, the payout control unit 7 or the like when it is determined that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a DC voltage of 24 V set in advance based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than 22 V set in advance. I will judge. When the power failure signal is received from the power control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. interrupt the control being executed and execute predetermined NMI interrupt processing.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 26. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is activated at power-on, main processing executed after activation, main timer interrupt processing periodically activated, executed at power failure Execute NMI interrupt processing etc. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 13 is a flow chart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 13, in step S <b> 1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing for determining the detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a and the out-of-ball sensor 35 are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball into any one of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. Further, when the out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 35, the MPU 41 adds one to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to update the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412 d. Do. The number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d is cleared to 0 when the 60,000-ball base B1 is calculated last time by reaching 60000-balls (step S1810 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 21). reference).

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 executes updating of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, respectively, and the counter values reach the maximum value. In the case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process in accordance with the winning of the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the firing control process, the game ball is detected on the condition that the player is touching the shooting handle 22 and the touch sensor 21a detects it and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the shooting is not operated. Processing to activate the launch of Further, the release control process invalidates the release of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player does not touch the release handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. Processing. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the through-gate draws the MPU 41 whether or not to set the electric combination 315b of the second winning opening 315 to the open position based on the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the combination hold area 412c. Execute the process Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. Then, the MPU 41 determines that the normal winning pattern is won when the normal random number counter C4 is 0 to 29 when the high frequency support mode is not set, and the MPU 41 is out of the case when the normal random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. It is determined that Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal winning pattern is won when the normal random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and is out of the case where the normal random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. It is determined that When the MPU 41 determines that the symbol is normally won in the through gate process, the MPU 41 opens the motorized product 315b only for a predetermined time. As a result, winning of the second winning opening 315 in the upper right of the game board 31 on which the electric role thing 315b is juxtaposed is possible.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 14, in step S <b> 1101, the MPU 41 determines whether there is a winning on the first winning opening 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning on the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it is determined that there is no winning on the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending count N stored in the pending count storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending count (four in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holdings N is the maximum number of holdings (step S1102: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of holdings N is not the maximum number of holdings (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of holdings N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 13, and the change type counter CS1 updated in main processing described later (step S1302 in FIG. And S1313), and stores the counter value in the first vacant reservation area among the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 determines the contents of the pass / fail information before the pass / fail information for the first hold obtained in step S1104 becomes the determination target of the jackpot in the variation start process (S1408 in FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) described later. A confirmation is performed, and a first hold command setting process of setting a first hold command in the RAM 412 based on the check result is executed. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning on the second winning opening 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning on the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it is determined that there is no winning on the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No) ), The start winning process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pending count M stored in the pending count storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending count (four in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: YES), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number of holdings M is not the maximum number of holdings (step S1107: NO), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of holdings M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 13, and the change type counter CS1 updated in main processing described later (step S1302 in FIG. And S1313), and stores the counter value in the first vacant reservation area among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the pass / fail information for the second hold obtained in step S1109 becomes the determination target of the jackpot in the variation start process described later (S1408 in FIG. 17 and FIG. 19). The contents are confirmed, and a second hold command setting process of setting a second hold command in the RAM 412 based on the check result is executed. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 15, and thus the detailed description will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 15, if “first hold command” is replaced with “second hold command” and “hold number N” is replaced with “hold number M” Good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. Note that the first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out), the variation pattern, and the number N of holds. . Hereinafter, the first hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 15, the MPU 41 reads the number N of holdings from the number of holdings storage area NAA of the first holding storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first holding from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode is selected. If the high probability mode is selected (step S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the high probability mode is not selected (step S1202) : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the gaming state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 16) in the main processing described later, whether or not the high probability mode is The determination is made based on the high probability mode flag set to off at the time of transition to another gaming state such as the state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 20 described later, and the high probability mode Based on the success or failure table, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win or not. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change process of FIG. Based on the probability mode success / failure table, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win or not.

  In steps S1203 and S1204, on the basis of the high probability mode success or failure table or the low probability mode success or failure table stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change process of FIG. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 20 described later, a high probability mode success / failure table or low probability according to the game setting value The mode pass / fail table may be selected one by one to make a pass / fail determination.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the big hit random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206 and the big hit random number counter C1. When it is determined that the counter value read out from is not the value corresponding to the big hit (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the acceptance information is stored in the third storage area RE3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 14, the jackpot type counter C2 included in the acceptance information stored in the third storage area RE3 and The counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read. Of the first reserve storage area RE1 to the fourth reserve storage area RE4, the reserve area for which the pass / fail information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. It can be judged by the value of.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of holdings N in the first holding command. As described above, since the first holding command includes the number N of holdings read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first holding command includes the number of holdings included in the first holding command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize in which of the first reserve storage area RE1 to the fourth reserve storage area RE4 the first reserve command corresponds to the acceptance information stored in the first reserve storage area RE1.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of reservations N as the first suspension command (step S1209).

  The first hold command set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and the other hold command is executed in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 16 described later executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. After being sent to the voice lamp control unit 5 with the command of. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and it is not limited to the one described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, some or all of the information of the first pending command may be included in other commands.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing, main control processing for the progression of the variable game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1310 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 msec cycle, for example, and the counter updating processing of steps S1311 to S1313 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1310 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 16, in step S1301, the MPU 41 controls the output data such as the command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 13 or the previous main process such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute external output processing to be sent to For example, in the RAM 412, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a game setting value change command, a unit jackpot lottery number update command, etc. If it is set, the command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, and the like. Then, if a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the game information of the RAM 412 when a winning is generated in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). The number of general prize-winning opening payout balls or the number of first winning-type opening payout balls stored in the area 412 d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning combination. Further, the MPU 41 is in the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state (the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode) or the probability variation gaming state (the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode). If a winning is occurring, the second winning opening payout ball number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning. Furthermore, in the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 stores the number of variable winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the winning is occurring in the variable winning hole 316, Update to the value added

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a change game control process for controlling the game in the change game. In addition, although the details of the fluctuation game control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, in the fluctuation game control processing, the above-mentioned big hit lottery is executed, and a fluctuation pattern command necessary for symbol fluctuation display by the symbol display portion 341 is set. Be done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the big hit lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progression of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for a jackpot game including an opening, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 316b in the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, thereby causing the transition to the big hit game. Run as many as you want. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times if the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times if the jackpot type is 16R probability variation jackpot. In the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the open / close execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when ending is started.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes gaming state transition processing for shifting the gaming state, based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the change start processing of FIG. 19 described later. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 determines the gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state in which the open / close execution mode is executed, the probability variation gaming state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and high It shifts to a time support game state which is a frequency support mode, and a normal game state which is not a high frequency support mode in a low probability mode.

  For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the change game notifying the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the big hit game is over, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the big hit gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery that triggered the execution of the big hit game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot In some cases, after the end of the jackpot game, transition to the time saving game state. In addition, when notification of the lottery result for the specified number of big hit lottery in the time saving game state is finished, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the change game is over.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is transitioned, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming flag to OFF while setting the high probability mode flag to ON. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the probability variation gaming state to the big hit gaming state, the high probability mode flag is set to off while the big hit gaming flag is set to on.

  Furthermore, when shifting the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "number of big hits" stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the main display unit 37. By this display control process, the symbol variation display is executed only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command by the 7 segment displays 372, 373 in the main display unit 37, and the symbol variation display is a symbol showing the lottery result It will be displayed stop. Further, by the display control processing, each LED lamp is blinked only during a predetermined normal symbol variation display time by the LED pair 371 in the main display section 37, and the presence or absence of the normal symbol winning is turned on and off of the pair of LED lamps. It is indicated by the lighting pattern which is a combination of It should be noted that, in the case of the normal symbol winning, the electric winning combination 315b attached to the second winning opening 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. In the game setting value change process, a process of controlling the change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d or the display or non-display of the game setting value is executed according to the operation on the setting value change operation unit 46 Ru. The details of the game setting value change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process, but the start-up process activated with the power on or the time from the start-up process until launch of the game ball is started. It is also considered to be limited and implemented. Thus, after the game is started by the player, the game setting value can not be changed until the next power-on, so that the game setting value is changed within the business hours of the game hall. It can prevent.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process of the game information. In the present embodiment, as the specific performance information, the base information, the unit jackpot lottery number, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio are updated. The details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of causing the performance display monitor 43 to display the base information updated in step S1309 is executed. The details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has come (step S1311: Yes), the processing is shifted to step S1301, and the above-described processing from S1301 is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main processing has not arrived (step S1311: No), it waits until the execution timing of the next main processing arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main processing. Steps S1311, S1312, and S1313 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived for the remaining time until the process reaches (step S1311: Yes).

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1313>
In step S1313, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1311.

[Fluctuation game control processing]
Here, FIG. 17 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the variation game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 17, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a big hit game, and if it is in a big hit game (step S1401: Yes), the fluctuation game control process is performed. When the jackpot game is not in progress (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. The presence or absence of execution of the jackpot game is set to ON at the time of transition to the jackpot gaming state, for example, in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. It is judged based on the jackpot game flag set to.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not symbol variation display is in progress, and if symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and symbol variation display is not in progress. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of variation display in step S1606 in variation start processing of FIG. 19 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes) The determination is made based on the variable display flag set to off in step S1405 of the variable game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, and if it is determined that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the fluctuation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the fluctuation game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: YES), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop and display symbols according to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variation game ( Step S1404) The variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not in progress (Step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the suspension storage area 412b and the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the fluctuation game control process. On the other hand, when one of the pending number N and the pending number M is not 0 (No at step S1406), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing on the data of the pass / fail information stored in the pending storage area 412b. When the processing of step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display section 341 to perform variation display based on the pass / fail information, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 18, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number M of holdings corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: Yes) Then, the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: YES), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of holdings stored in the number of holdings area NAA (step S1502), and from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE. The success or failure information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserve area REA2 to the fourth reserve area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4 is Move the pass / fail information to the third reserve area REA3. When the processing of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 proceeds when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 proceeds when both or one of the number of reservations M and the number of reservations N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and thus executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts one from the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the pass / fail information from the first pending area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserve area REB2 to the fourth reserve area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the pass / fail information of the second reserve area REB2 is moved to the first reserve area REB1, and the pass / fail information of the third reserve area REB3 is moved to the second reserve area REB2, and the fourth reserve area REB4 is The success or failure information is moved to the third reserve area REB3. When the processing of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a shift command indicating that the pass / fail information of the first reserve area REA1 to the fourth reserve area REA4 or the first reserve area REB1 to the fourth reserve area REB4 has shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the display number etc. of the reservation symbol displayed on symbol display part 341 will be changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and shifts the process to step S1408 of FIG.

[Change start process]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 19, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether it is the high probability mode or not is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag set to on in the game state transition processing of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 16 is set to on. . When the gaming state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is the low probability mode If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 stores the hold storage area based on the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change process of FIG. Whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the success or failure information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to a jackpot win is judged. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 holds the low probability mode pass / fail table (see FIG. 7A) stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change process of FIG. It is judged whether the counter value of the big hit random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit / fall information stored in the execution area AE of the storage area 412b is the value corresponding to the big hit.

  In steps S1602 and S1603, the determination of acceptance is performed based on the high probability mode success / failure table or the low probability mode success / failure table stored according to the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value change process of FIG. In steps S1602 and S1603, after reading the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. 20 described later, the high probability mode success / failure table or low probability according to the game setting value The mode pass / fail table may be selected one by one to make a pass / fail determination.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation display time of the 7-segment displays 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation game to the fluctuation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the determination of the success or failure in step S1602 or S1603 is usually a large jackpot, the MPU 41 changes the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 8A). Identify. Further, when the result of the determination of the qualification in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8B). . Further, when the result of the determination of the qualification at step S1602 or S1603 is out, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table (see FIG. 8C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604. Thus, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays symbols based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display or the like by the unit 341 is executed.

  In addition, as described above, when the lottery result is “normal win”, the MPU 41 “A01” to “A” indicating “A” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “03” are 5R normal wins. "A03" is set in the RAM 412 as a fluctuation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 any of “B01” to “B03” in which “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 any of “C01” to “C03” with “C” indicating that the variation patterns “01” to “03” are the 16R probability variation jackpot Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 changes one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that the fluctuation patterns “01” to “08” are off. Set in the RAM 412 as a command. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 includes, in the fluctuation pattern command, information as to whether it is the front or back reach, the reach other than the front or back, or the complete out.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts symbol fluctuation display on the main display unit 37, and ends the fluctuation start processing. When the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 is started, the MPU 41 sets the variation display flag to ON. This variation display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variation game process of FIG. 17 in order to determine whether or not symbol variation display of the main display portion 37 is in progress. Further, when the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, when the result of the success or failure judgment based on the low probability mode success / failure table in step S1603 is out, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “number of consecutive disconnections” stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the success or failure is a big hit. Clear "the number of consecutive deviations" to 0 in a certain case.

[Game setting change processing]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the game setting value change processing will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not symbol variation display is in progress, and when symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the game setting value change process is ended. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: NO), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not symbol variation display is in progress is determined based on the variation display flag set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation display is not in progress (Step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state is in progress (Step S1702). If the jackpot gaming state is in effect (Step S1702: Yes) The value change process is ended, and when it is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: No), the process is shifted to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot gaming state flag set on in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If neither the symbol variation display nor the big hit gaming state (No in step S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, It is determined whether or not the setting value change operation unit 46 has been operated to turn on the power of the game setting value display unit 45. That is, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the display of the game setting value is not performed, and the game setting value can be changed. Absent. Here, when the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from OFF to ON (Step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to Step S1704, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from OFF to ON. If it is not switched to (step S1703: NO), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
If the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: YES), the MPU 41 reads the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1704) A number indicating the read game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). Thus, the current game setting value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 sets a flag displaying flag indicating that the game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 to ON (step S1706), and ends the game setting value changing process.

<Step S1707>
If the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: NO), the MPU 41 determines whether the flag for displaying the setting value is set to on (step S1707). The setting value display flag indicates that the game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 if the setting value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), and sets the setting value display flag to off (step S1707: No). That is, when the game setting value display unit 45 is not turned on and the power is not turned on, the game setting value changing process is ended.

<Step S1708>
If the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game setting value has been made. If the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709, and if the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: NO), The process shifts to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
If the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: YES), the MPU 41 executes processing to change the display on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before the rotation. Conversely, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated leftward by a predetermined angle, a number smaller than the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before rotation is displayed.

  In addition, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before the rotation is “4”, the setting value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle. The set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the left direction when the displayed number is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 before rotation is "1". In the case, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed to “4”. In addition, when the number displayed in the game setting value display unit 45 is “4”, it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and the number displayed in the game setting value display unit 45 is “1”. In some cases, it may not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number being displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as the game setting value, and ends the game setting value change processing. Thereby, when the power of the setting value change operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally set as the valid game setting value in the RAM 412. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46. Then, the game setting value can be determined by turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 while the number corresponding to the desired game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
When the setting value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the setting value. It is determined whether or not the change operation unit 46 has been operated to turn off the power of the game setting value display unit 45. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1712, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S1711: NO), the game setting value change process is ended. In addition, when the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the game setting value display unit 45 shuts off the power to the 7-segment display, thereby stopping the game setting value. Is turned off, and the game setting value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 determines the low probability mode according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 at step S1710. The pass / fail table (see FIG. 7A) and the high probability mode pass / fail table (see FIG. 7B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the flag displaying flag to OFF, and ends the game setting value changing process.

  Here, in step S1712, the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7A) and the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) corresponding to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Is selected. That is, since the success / failure table of the same game setting value is selected in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the change operation of the game setting value is easy. However, the game setting value in the low probability mode and the game setting value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, for example, the game setting value in the low probability mode is “1”, and the game setting value in the high probability mode is “4”, etc. It becomes possible to set it as a set value.

Performance information update process
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in the main process of FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 21, the MPU 41 reads out the number of payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 (step S 1801), and further, the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412. Reading is performed (step S1802). Here, the number of payout balls is the number of payout balls required for updating the base information, etc., and the number of general winning opening payout balls, the number of first winning opening payout balls, the number of second winning opening payout balls, and the variable winning mouth payout balls The number corresponds. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read general winning opening payout number, the first winning opening number, and the number of out balls, and the base information stored in the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 The current base BL is overwritten and updated (step S1803) (see FIG. 22A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (the number of general winning a prize winning balls + the number of first winning a prize balls) / the number of out balls.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads the accumulated jackpot lottery number (accumulated fluctuation display number) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (Step S1805). The number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is calculated as the number of symbol variation display times of the seven-segment display 372 (the number of times a jackpot lottery has been received) until it becomes 250 minus balls in the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is calculated as unit jackpot lottery number of times = "cumulative jackpot lottery number" / (("out ball number"-"general winning opening amount payout amount number"-"first winning number opening amount payout number") / 250 balls) Be done. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery number of times” is calculated as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery number of times since the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall until the present.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of out balls read in step S1802 has reached 60000 balls, and if the number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the processing is performed in step S1807 If the number of out-of-balls has not reached 60000 (step S1806: No), the specific performance information update process ends.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
If the number of out-of-balls has reached 60000 (step S1806: YES), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 22 (A) and 22 (B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the last 60,000 ball base in the base information (step S1807), step S1803. The current base BL updated in the previous step is shifted to the last 60,000-ball base B1 (step S1808), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of payout balls and the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S 1810), and ends the specific performance information update process.

[Display control process of performance display monitor]
Here, FIG. 23 to FIG. 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1310 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 26.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the flag under BL display is set to on. Here, the flag under BL display is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. If the BL in-display flag is set to on (step S1901: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in FIG. 24, and if the BL in-display flag is set to off (step S1901: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL displaying flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 displaying flag is set to on (step S1902). Here, the B1 in-display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 has been displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 in FIG. 24 described later. The MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1918 in FIG. 25 if the B1 displaying flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), and the B1 displaying flag is set to off (step S1902: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 is displayed twice before the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1921 in FIG. 25 described later. When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1926 in FIG. 26, and when the B2 display flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from off to on (step S1904: No) End display control processing.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is an example shown in FIG. 22A, "8.""L","L" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 22 (B), the current base BL is 0% “8.”, “L”, “0” and “0” indicating that there is a display are displayed on four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag on (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. Finish.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the flag under BL display is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. 23 (step It is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The last 60,000-ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412 d of the RAM 412 is an example shown in FIG. 22A, “8.”, “1” indicating that the last 60,000 ball base B1 is 33% ",""3" and "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2” and “9” indicating that the base B 1 is 29% are displayed on four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), and sets the B1 display time counter for causing the performance display monitor 43 to display the last 60,000 ball base B1 for a predetermined time (step S1913) End display control processing.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: NO), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: YES), the process proceeds to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1914: No) End display control processing. If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: YES), the performance display monitor 43 is an alphabet indicating the current base BL by interrupting the energization to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434. And the numbers are extinguished.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: YES), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915) and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1916), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 25, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. 24 (step In step S1917), it is determined whether the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No) ), The process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The performance display monitor 43 is made to display the 60,000-ball base B2 before the second time included in the information (step S1920). For example, in the case where the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 22A, "8.", "2" indicates that the 60,000-ball base B2 is 32% before the last time. ",""3" and "2" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is an example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3” and “3” indicating that the base B 2 is 33% are displayed on four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the fixed time for causing the performance display monitor 43 to display the 60,000 ball base B2 twice before (step S1922) , And the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: NO), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1923: No) End display control processing. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the current supply to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, whereby the previous 60,000 ball base B1 The letters and numbers indicating the light are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
If the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to off (step S1924) and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1924) S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. 25 (step S1926) It is determined whether the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The current condition base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is an example shown in FIG. 22A, "8.""L","L" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 22 (B), the current base BL is 0% “8.”, “L”, “0” and “0” indicating that there is a display are displayed on four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag on (step S1930), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. Finish.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: NO), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933. When the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1932: No) End display control processing. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and the 60,000-ball base B2 of the previous time The letters and numbers indicating the light are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1934), the display control process ends.

[Process of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 51, the process executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described.

  It is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the electric decoration portion 27, start processing at the start of the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power failure, etc. The description of those processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process of 1 msec cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the MPU 51 performs an operation detection process (step S2001), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), a counter update process (step S2003), and a command determination process (step S2004) in the sub timer interrupt process. The fluctuation game effect process (step S2005) and the jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process (step S2001) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, whereby the presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 20 at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt process. Will be judged.

<Steps S2101 to S2103>
As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2101, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second operation detection flag to the first operation detection flag. In step S2102, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third operation detection flag to the second operation detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2103, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third operation detection flag, and the operation detection process is ended.

  As described above, in the operation detection process, by performing the processes of steps S2101 to S2103, the operation states for the last three 1-msec intervals as the operation history of the operation button 20 are the first operation detection flag to the third operation detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third operation detection flag, the immediately preceding operation state is stored as the second operation detection flag, and the two previous operation states are stored as the first operation detection flag. .

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Here, FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag Set the flag. The operation pattern flag includes first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of the on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 30, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. When only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started. When only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended. Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is not performed.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 29, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to on. Here, when the first operation detection flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2202, and when the first operation detection flag is off (step S2201: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S2205.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to on. Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2203, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2202: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S2208.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2204, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2203: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S2210.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued when the operation pattern of “on”, “on”, and “on” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. The first operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 30). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing.

<Step S2205>
When the MPU 51 determines that the first operation detection flag is off in step S2201 (step S2201: No), whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S2205). Here, when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2206, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2205: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S2210.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2207, and when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2206: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S2210.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the non-operation state to the operation state when an operation pattern of “off”, “on”, “on” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times (operation Since the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 30). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the operation button 20 is started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, false detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2208>
When the MPU 51 determines that the second operation detection flag is off in step S 2202 (step S 2202: No), it determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. (Step S2208). Here, when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2208: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2210, and when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2208: No), the processing is performed. It transfers to step S2209.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the operation state to the non-operation state when the operation pattern of “on”, “off”, “off” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times (operation Since the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 30). Then, the third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 is ended). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation states of the operation button 20 for three times are reflected. Alternatively, false detection of the start of the operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of the operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2210>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as “off”, “off”, “off” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. (See FIG. 30). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state.

Counter update process
Here, returning to the explanation of FIG. 27, in the counter updating process (step S2003), the MPU 51 executes updating of the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the fluctuation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the main symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts one from the fluctuation display counter. The fluctuation display counter is for counting the fluctuation display time of the symbol display portion 341, and the counter value in the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes zero. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp that the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display portion 341 is finished, and the like. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type that suggests the game setting value. For example, the character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 114. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the character type classification counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The character type classification counter updated here is used to determine the character type classification that indicates the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers. For example, the character type classification counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 119. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the opening basic effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening basic effect type counter updated here is used to determine the basic effect type at the opening of the jackpot game. For example, the opening basic effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the opening rank suggestion image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The opening rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine a rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number to be executed together with the basic effect at the opening of the big hit game. For example, the opening rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 104. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the ending basic rendering type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The ending basic effect type counter updated here is used to determine the basic effect type at the end of the jackpot game. For example, the ending basic effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the ending rank suggestion image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The ending rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine a rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number to be executed along with the basic effect in the ending of the big hit game. For example, the ending rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 74. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the open / close execution mode rendering scenario type, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The open / close execution mode effect scenario type updated here is used to determine the effect scenario type in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game. For example, the open / close execution mode effect scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 79. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the round game character type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game character type counter updated here is used to determine the character type in the round game of the jackpot game. For example, the round game character type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 49. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the round game rank suggested image type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The round game rank suggestion effect type counter updated here is used to determine a rank suggestion image type that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number to be executed along with the round game effect of the big hit game. For example, the round game rank suggestion image type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 89.

Command judgment processing
In the command determination process (step S2004), a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S 2301, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S2302. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received a command (Step S2301: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines the presence or absence of reception of the command by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined in step S 2301 to be received, and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it becomes the target of processing, for example, in the processing work storage area. It is memorized.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, if the command is a variation pattern command (step S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303, and if the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2307.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines a fluctuation pattern (a main symbol stop symbol combination and an effect type (effect pattern)) based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 receives a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 32A) stored in advance in the ROM 511, a variation type table (see FIG. 32B), and an effect type table (see FIG. 32B). Based on FIGS. 33A to 33C and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag ON when the jackpot type is 5R probability variation jackpot, jackpot type If 16R probability variation jackpot, set 16R probability variation jackpot flag on.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is the main symbol that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is the main symbol that is secondly displayed stop, and the last stop symbol is finally displayed stopped. The symbol is In the effect type table, a normal reach effect pattern table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 33A), a super reach effect pattern table corresponding to super reach (refer to FIG. 33B), special reach effect corresponding to special reach A pattern table (see FIG. 33C) is included.

  Here, FIG. 32 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 32 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display portion 341 is determined. In addition, FIG. 32 (A) is a symbol combination which shows that the main symbol is "1"-"9" and "333" is a probability variation big hit (either 5R probability variation big hit and 16R probability variation big hit), "777" "The symbol combination which shows that it is 16R probability variation big hit, It is a symbol combination which shows that Zoro eyes except" 333 "and" 777 "are either 5R regular hit, 5R probability variation big hit and 16R probability variation big hit. It is assumed.

  There is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol in the lottery result "5R normal jackpot", and the first stop symbol with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "3" and "7" It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination "333" or "777" indicating that it is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  Moreover, there is no distribution of "7" as a 1st stop symbol in a lottery result "5R probability variation big hit", and a 1st stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from main symbols other than "7". That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", symbol combinations other than symbol combination "333" indicating 5R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of the eyelids other than the symbol combination of "333" which suggests that the stop display result of the main symbol indicates 5R normal jackpot may be stopped and displayed. And, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit", when the main symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 is 5R probability variation big hit in the jackpot game Execute the 5R probability change promotion effect to be specified.

  Furthermore, the lottery result is "16 probability variation big hit", there is a distribution for all the main symbols of "1"-"9", and the first stop with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1"-"9" The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than symbol combinations “777” indicating that it is 16R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination other than the symbol combination of the symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" which indicates that the stop display result of the main symbol indicates 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is stop display It can be done. When the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

  And MPU51 will determine the 2nd stop symbol and the last stop symbol to the same symbol as the 1st stop symbol determined previously, if a 1st stop symbol is determined, when a lottery result is a big hit. Thereby, the stop symbol combination stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display portion 341 in the game run is determined.

  On the other hand, the lottery result is "off", there is a distribution to all the main symbols of "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols of "1" to "9" Be done. And MPU51 will determine the 1st stop symbol when a lottery result is "off", if it is based on a out classification classification table (Drawing 7 (D)), the out classification selected, and the 1st stop determined previously The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the offclassification type is the back and forth offreach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the off classification is reach other than back and forth, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined to be a symbol. Moreover, when the said outclassification type is complete detachment, a 2nd stop symbol is determined as a symbol different from a 1st stop symbol, and a final stop symbol is determined irrespective of a 1st stop symbol and a 2nd stop symbol. In addition, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined in the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined in the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are displayed in the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 32B is a diagram showing an example of the fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 32 (B), in the fluctuation type table, the contents of the fluctuation display time and the fluctuation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are defined. For example, the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “normal reach effect pattern” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “A01” in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the fluctuation pattern is “01”. In addition, the fluctuation display time "60s" and the fluctuation type "super reach effect pattern" are associated with the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variation big hit" and the fluctuation pattern is "02". The fluctuation display time "90s" and the fluctuation type "special reach effect pattern" are associated with the fluctuation pattern command "C03" whose lottery result is "16R probability fluctuation big hit" and the fluctuation pattern is "03". Furthermore, the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach effect pattern" are associated with the fluctuation pattern command "D04" whose lottery result is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "04", and the lottery is The fluctuation display time “10 s” and the fluctuation type “non-reach effect pattern” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “D05” whose result is “displacement” and the fluctuation pattern is “05”.

  Furthermore, FIG. 33 (A)-FIG.33 (C) are figures which show an example of an effect pattern classification table. The effect pattern type table is set for each change type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 33 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type table to be referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a normal reach effect, and FIG. 33 (B) is a final individual in the variable game effect FIG. 33C is a super reach effect pattern table referred to when the effect type is super reach effect, and FIG. 33C is a special reach effect referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is special reach effect It is a pattern table.

  In the present embodiment, although the case where the effect type corresponding to each variation type is five is described as an example, the effect type may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 33, the effect type table when the change type is not reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach effect pattern type table shown in FIG. 33 (A), as an effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, and out) “Effect pattern X1” to “effect pattern X5” are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the change type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type table according to the lottery result. Do. Here, the effect pattern X1 to effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type table is, for example, an effect in which normal reach effect in which the main symbol is in the reach state is executed after the high speed fluctuation effect in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed. The final individual effect type is the effect that becomes normal reach effect.

  Further, in the super reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33 (B), “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y5” are defined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (render pattern) is a super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the super reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result select. Here, for the effect pattern Y1 to effect pattern Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern table, for example, normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and further, the jackpot expectation is higher than normal reach effect as the final individual effect type, This is a development that develops into a super reach production with a longer execution time than the normal reach production. The super reach effect pattern table may include a super reach effect pattern effect which develops into a super reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without passing through the normal reach effect.

  Furthermore, in the special reach effect pattern table shown in FIG. 33C, “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern Z5” are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. There is. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (render pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter from the special reach effect pattern table according to the lottery result select. Here, for the effect pattern Z1 to effect pattern Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern table, for example, normal reach effect and super reach effect are executed after the end of high-speed fluctuation effect, and normal reach effect or super reach effect as the final individual effect type. It is a presentation that develops into a special reach presentation that has a higher jackpot expectation and is longer than the normal reach presentation. The special reach effect pattern table may include a special reach effect pattern that develops into a special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect without passing through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. Good.

  Then, the MPU 51 displays in the RAM 512 a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation pattern table, the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined based on the effect type table and the effect type counter, and the fluctuation type (effect pattern type). Set

<Step S2304>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 31, in step S2304, the MPU 51 executes a pop-out performance suggestion image display process for causing the sub image display unit 38 to display a pop-out performance suggestion image that suggests a pop-out performance. In the payout performance suggestion image display process, the payout feature suggestion image of the aspect in which the character selected according to the game setting value when the specific condition is satisfied is selected according to the unit jackpot lottery number is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 Display on. In addition, the detail of a pop-out ball performance suggestion process is later mentioned with reference to FIG.

<Step S2305>
In step S2305, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command to the fluctuation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined in accordance with fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the variation display counter is decremented by one in the counter update process (step S2003) of FIG. 27 and the MPU 51 is based on the variation display counter to determine whether symbol variation display is in progress or not It is possible to judge For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes zero.

<Step S2306>
In step S2306, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display fluctuation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display portion 341, the fluctuation type (rendering pattern type), and the contents of the ball output performance suggestion image. And ends the command determination process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined in step S2303, the variation type (rendering pattern type), and the ball-outset performance suggestion image. On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores, for example, a fluctuation image and effect image of a main symbol corresponding to each of the display fluctuation pattern commands. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the fluctuation display and the effect display in the symbol display portion 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation type and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the fluctuation display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until the preset fluctuation display time elapses, The change of the main symbol of is displayed in order stop. During the fluctuation display of the main symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the fluctuation type (rendering pattern type) specified by the display fluctuation pattern command are executed by the symbol display portion 341, the speaker 26, the electric decoration portion 27, etc. . On the other hand, in the sub-image display unit 38, when the specific condition is satisfied, the pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed.

<Step S2307>
In step S2307, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that the big hit game is started, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2307: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2308, and if the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2307: No), the process In step S2310.

<Step S2308>
When the jackpot game start command is received, the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game effect determination process (step S2308). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process for determining an effect to be executed by the symbol display portion 341 or the like when the gaming state shifts to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2309>
In step S2309, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot gaming effect start flag on. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting a jackpot game effect (opening effect), and is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. 51 described later. (Step S2601).

<Step S2310>
In step S2310, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command to start each round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the big hit game and to indicate what round the round game is, and the big hit game control process in the main process of FIG. It is set in. Here, when the received command is the round game start command (step S2310: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2311, and when the received command is not the round game start command (step S2310: No), the process In step S2313.

<Steps S2311 and S2312>
In step S2311, the MPU 51 sets a round game effect start flag to on. The round game effect start flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not the round game effect start process is to be executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2604). Then, the MPU 51 stores the number of rounds of the round game to be started in the RAM 512 as the number of rounds information, based on the number of rounds information indicating what round is the round game included in the round game start command (Steps S2312).

<Step S2313>
In step S2313, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating starting the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the ending start command (step S2313: YES), the processing proceeds to step S2314. If the received command is not the ending start command (step S2312: NO), the processing is performed. It transfers to S2315.
<Step S2314>
In step S2314, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag on. The ending effect start flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not the ending effect process is to be executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 51 described later (step S2609).

<Step S2315>
In step S2315, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is the jackpot game end command (Step S2315: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2316, and if the received command is not the jackpot game end command (Step S2315: No), the process In step S2317.

<Step S2316>
In step S2316, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot gaming effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and in the case of the jackpot game effect processing of FIG. (Step S2612).

<Step S2317>
In step S2317, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a game setting value change command. The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the game setting value change process of FIG. Be done. Here, when the received command is the game setting value change command (step S2317: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2318, and when the received command is not the game setting value change command (step S2317: No) , And moves the process to step S2319.

<Step S2318>
In step S2318, the MPU 51 changes and stores the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting value included in the game setting value change command. Note that the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2404 in the processing for displaying the ball performance shown in FIG. 34 described later, and is referred to select a character type that suggests the game setting value.

<Step S2319>
In step S2319, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a unit jackpot lottery number update command. The unit jackpot lottery number update command is to the first winning opening 314 per a fixed number of minus balls (for example, minus 250 balls) in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode). It is a command to notify the sound lamp control device 5 of the number of times the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed (the number of times the jackpot lottery has been received) upon winning a prize. It is updated in step S1805 in the update process. Here, when the received command is a unit jackpot lottery number update command (step S2319: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2320, and the received command is not a unit jackpot lottery number update command (step S2319: No), the process proceeds to step S2321.

<Step S2320>
In step S2320, the MPU 51 updates the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the RAM 512 to the unit jackpot lottery number included in the unit jackpot lottery number update command. Note that the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the RAM 512 is read in step S2407 in the processing for displaying the ball performance shown in FIG. 34 described later, and selects the type of character mode that suggests the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number. Referenced to.

<Step S2321>
In step S2321, the MPU 51 executes the process based on the other command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Did-ball performance suggestion image display processing]
In the payout performance suggesting image display process executed in step S2304 of the command determination process of FIG. 31, the game setting value suggesting character selected according to the game setting value when the specific condition is satisfied corresponds to the unit jackpot lottery number It is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 as a pop-out ball performance suggestion image in the character mode selected. In the present embodiment, a specific condition for displaying the ball withdrawal performance display image in the change game state is that a jackpot lottery (change game) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times). The specific condition may be another condition, and the details thereof will be described as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the ball performance suggested image is displayed according to the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number, but instead of one or both of these performance information, other performance information (base information, It is also possible to display a pop-out performance suggestion image based on the continuous character ratio information, the character ratio information, and the like. Here, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the pop-up ball performance suggestion image display process. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 34, an example of the procedure of the pop-up ball performance suggestion image display process will be described.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot lottery counter set to 1000 in step S2403 described later (step S2401), and determines whether the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 or not. It judges (Step S2402). That is, in step S2402, it is determined whether or not the number of jackpot lottery numbers has reached 1000 times. When the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2403, and when the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S2402: No), The process shifts to step S2411.

<Steps S2403 to S2405>
If the value of the jackpot lottery counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2402: YES), the MPU 51 sets the value of the jackpot lottery counter to 1000. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2404), and selects the character type according to the game setting value (step S2405). That is, in the variable gaming state in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is notified, it is a specific condition that the big hit lottery number (the variable game number) reaches 1000 times, and the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed. In addition, the specific condition on which the ball withdrawal performance suggestion image is displayed in the fluctuation game is not limited to the jackpot lottery number (the fluctuation game number) reaching 1000 times, and may be another condition. For example, that the number of big win lottery (the number of fluctuation game) reaches a predetermined number other than 1000 times, that the number of big hit reaches the predetermined number, that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is continuously out of the predetermined number, the fluctuation game effect As a specific condition, a specific effect may be executed as a specific condition, or a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to display a ball-out performance indication image, and the lottery may be selected.

  Here, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of a game setting value suggesting character type that suggests a game setting value. FIG. 36 is a view showing an example of a game setting value suggesting character selection table for selecting a game setting value suggesting character.

  As shown in FIG. 35, as the game setting value suggesting character types, male character (hereinafter "Sam"), female character A (hereinafter "Marin"), female character B (hereinafter "Warin"), female character C (hereinafter " "Urin"), marine life character A (hereinafter "dugon") and marine life character B (hereinafter "shark") are included. "Sam" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is four. "Marine" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is three. “Warin” is a character that suggests that the game setting value is two. "Urin" is a character indicating that the game setting value is one. "Jugong" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is an even number (2 or 4). The "shark" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is an odd number (1 or 3). This point is also apparent from the game setting value suggested character selection table shown in FIG.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36, in the game setting value suggested character selection table, when the game setting value is 4, "Sum" is most easily selected, then "Jugon" is more easily selected, and these characters Other characters are more difficult to select than. When the game setting value is 3, "Marine" is most likely to be selected, then "shark" is more likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game setting value is 2, "Warin" is most easily selected, then "Dugong" is more easily selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters. When the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is most likely to be selected, then "shark" is more likely to be selected, and other characters are less likely to be selected than these characters.

  As described above, "Sam" is a character that is easily selected when the game setting value is 4, and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4, and "Marin" is selected when the game setting value is 3. Is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 3 and “Warin” is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 2 and that the game setting value is 2. “Urin” is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 1, and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1. In addition, “Jugong” is more easily selected when the game setting is 2 or 4 than when the game setting is 1 or 3, suggesting that the game setting is 2 or 4 (even). It is a character. In addition, "shark" is more easily selected when the game setting is 1 or 3 than when the game setting is 2 or 4, suggesting that the game setting is 1 or 3 (odd number). It is a character.

<Step S2406>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selected game setting value suggesting character is "Jugon" or "shark" (step S2406). That is, it is determined whether the selected game setting value suggesting character is a male character and female characters A to C. If the game setting value suggested character is "Jugon" or "shark" (step S2406: YES), the process proceeds to step S2409, and if the game setting value suggested character is not "Jugon" or "shark" (step S2406: No), the process proceeds to step S2407.

<Steps S2407 and S2408>
If the game setting value suggested character is not "Jugon" or "shark" (Step S2406: No), the MPU 51 acquires the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the RAM 512 (Step S2407), and the unit jackpot lottery number (Rank Mode selection of the game setting value suggesting character in accordance with)) (step S2408). That is, when the game setting value suggesting character is other than “Jugon” and “shark”, the unit jackpot winning number (rank) is suggested by the mode of the game setting value suggesting character. Even in the case where the game setting value suggesting characters are “Jugon” and “shark”, the unit jackpot lottery number (rank) may be suggested according to the mode of the game setting value suggesting character.

  Here, FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are diagrams showing an example of the character mode selection table for selecting the mode of the game setting value suggesting character. The character mode selection table is defined for each rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers. In the present embodiment, if the unit jackpot lottery number is 25 times or more, “rank S”, if the unit jackpot lottery number is 20 or more and less than 25 times, “rank A”, the unit jackpot lottery number is 15 or more and 20 times If it is less than "rank B", if the unit jackpot lottery number of times is 10 or more and less than 15 times "rank C", or if the unit jackpot lottery number is less than 10 times "rank D", each A character mode selection table is defined for each rank.

  Also, in each character mode selection table, a character mode is defined for each game setting value suggested character, and the mode that suggests a rank differs depending on the game setting value suggested character type. For example, in the case of "Sam", the figure suggests the rank of the number of lottery winning lots. Specifically, being in the super macho form is “rank S”, being an macho form (see FIG. 35) is “rank A”, and in the fine macho form is “rank B” It is suggested that it is "G rank B" by being a Gali form and "Rank C" by being a Galicari form (see FIG. 39A).

  Also, in the case of "Marine", the costume suggests the rank of the number of times of winning the unit jackpot. Specifically, the clothes being "kimono" are "Rank S", the clothes being Santa are "Rank A", and the clothes being "Happi" are "Rank B", The costume is a bikini (see FIG. 35), which indicates that it is "Rank B", and that the costume is a tank top indicates that it is "Rank C".

  Also, in the case of "warin" and "urin", it indicates the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number by the posture, the pose, and the like. In the case of "warin", it indicates that the ranks are higher in the order of wink, finger, triangle sitting (see FIG. 35), upright posture and leaning posture. In the case of "Urin", it indicates that the ranks are higher in the order of V sign, guts pose, OK sign (see FIG. 35), good sign and bye-bye.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, when the unit jackpot lottery number of times is "rank S" (the unit jackpot lottery number of times is 25 times or more), in "Sam", the super match figure is most easily selected while the other figure is It is hard to be selected, and in "Marin", the kimono costume is the most easily selected, while other costumes are hard to be selected. In ', while the V sign is most easily selected, it is difficult to select another pose. In other words, "Sam" is a super macho figure, "Marin" is a kimono, "Warin" is winking, and "Urin" is a V sign. , It indicates that the number of times the unit jackpot lottery is "rank S".

  As shown in FIG. 37B, when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank A” (the unit jackpot lottery number is 20 or more and less than 25), in “Sam”, the macho figure is most easily selected, but the other It is hard to select body shape, and in "Marine", Santa's costume is most easily selected while other costumes are hard to select. In "Warin", fingernails are most easily selected while other postures and poses are hard to be selected. In "Urin," Guts pose is most easily selected, but other poses are hard to be selected. In other words, "Sam" is a macho figure, "Marin" is a costume that is Santa, "Warin" is a pose that blows a finger, and "Urin" is doing a guts pose Then, it is suggested that the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is "rank A".

  As shown in FIG. 37C, when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank B” (unit jackpot lottery number is 15 or more and less than 20), the thin match is most easily selected in “Sam” while the others are most easily selected. Body shape is hard to select, and in "Marine" the happiest costume is most easily selected while other costumes are hard to be selected. Although it is difficult, in the case of “Urin”, the OK sign is most easily selected, but other poses are hardly selected. In other words, "Sam" is a fine macho figure, "Marin" is a happy costume, "Warin" has a triangular sitting, and "Urin" poses an OK sign. This suggests that the number of times the unit jackpot lottery is "rank B".

  As shown in FIG. 38 (A), when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank C” (unit jackpot lottery number is 10 or more and less than 15), the “Gali” form is most easily selected in “Sam” while the other is more Body shape is difficult to select, bikini clothes are the most easily selected in "Marine", but it is difficult to select other costumes, while "Warin" is most easily selected in the upright posture, it is difficult to select other postures and poses. , "Urin", while good sign is most easily selected, it is difficult to select other poses. In other words, "Sam" is a Gali form, "Marin" is a bikini, "Warin" is an upright posture, and "Urin" is a good sign. It indicates that the jackpot lottery number is "rank C".

  As shown in FIG. 38 (B), when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank D” (the unit jackpot lottery number is less than 10 times), “gum” is most easily selected in “Sam” while the other body shape is selected. It is hard to be selected, and in "Marine" tank top costumes are most easily selected while other costumes are hard to be selected, while in "Warin" it is most easy to choose a peeping posture but other postures and poses are hard to be selected. In "Urin", bye-bye is most likely to be selected, but it is difficult for other poses to be selected. In other words, "Sam" is a gigantic figure, "Marin" is a tank top, and "Warin" has a plunging posture, and "Urin" is posing a bye-bye In this case, it is suggested that the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank D”.

<Steps S2409 and S2410>
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, the MPU 51 causes the sub image display unit 38 to display a pop-out ball performance suggestion image (step S2409). Specifically, when the game setting value suggested character selected in step S2405 is other than “Jugon” or “shark” (step S2406: No), the game selected in step S2405 as a ball-out performance suggestion image The setting value suggesting character is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in the mode selected in step S2408. On the other hand, if the game setting value suggested character selected in step S2405 is "Jugon" or "shark" (step S2406: Yes), "Jugon" or "Jugon" or The “shark” is displayed on the sub image display unit 38. Then, the MPU 51 sets a flag indicating that the output-ball performance indication is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 to a flag indicating that the display is in progress (step S2410), and ends the output-ball-performance indication image display processing. .

  Here, FIG. 39 is a view showing an example of a ball-out performance suggestion image in the fluctuation game. In the pop-up performance suggestion image shown in FIG. 39 (A), a “Sam” of a gully body is displayed, and it is suggested that the game setting value is 4 and the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank D”. Further, in the pop-up performance suggestion image shown in FIG. 39 (B), “Urin” of the OK sign pose is displayed, suggesting that the game setting value is 1 and the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank C”. It is done.

  In the present embodiment, a popped ball performance suggestion image suggesting a popped ball performance in the variation game can be displayed, and the player is asked to confirm the popped ball performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38. While being able to concentrate on a game, it can be inferred by the ball | bowl performance performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display part 38, and it can be enjoyed and enjoyed. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed as suggesting the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number. Here, the game setting value defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (a jackpot probability). Therefore, it is possible to suggest the out-dump performance based on the index in which the out-dump performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected by evaluating the out-dump performance based on the jackpot probability. In addition, the number of unit jackpots is the first prize until the number of drop balls reaches minus a predetermined number of balls (for example, minus 250 balls) or until the number of firing balls of game balls (number of out balls) reaches a specified number of balls. This is the number of times the shift determination is performed with the game ball entering the mouth 314 as a trigger. In other words, the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is an index indicating the ease of winning a jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state (a low probability mode and not a short time mode), and a game ball necessary for a jackpot lottery result to be a big hit Affects the number (spills in normal gaming state). Therefore, since the evaluation based on the plurality of performance information including the unit jackpot lottery number is evaluated, it becomes possible to make an evaluation reflecting the ball in the normal gaming state, so that the game performance of the gaming machine is It becomes possible to indicate the ball performance based on the indicator reflected more appropriately.

  In place of one or both of the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number, it may be possible to suggest the game performance based on the base, the continuous character ratio or the character ratio.

  Here, the base is the payout rate (outgoing ball rate) in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the high frequency support mode) as described above, that is, the "number of out balls" in the normal gaming state. It is a ratio of the number of total paid-out balls of "the number of general winning a prize winning balls" and the "number of first winning a hole balls paid out". Therefore, by suggesting the ball withdrawal performance based on the base, it affects the number of game balls required until the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state becomes the jackpot (slip ball in the normal gaming state) . Therefore, it is possible to suggest the ball out performance based on the index on which the ball out performance of the gaming machine 10 is more appropriately reflected by the ball out performance being evaluated based on the plurality of performance information including the base Become.

  In addition, the continuous character ratio is the total by winning in all winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315, and variable winning opening 316) which have payouts of winning balls as described above. In the number of payout balls, it is a ratio occupied by the number of variable winning and payout balls. In other words, the continuous character ratio is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot (stay ratio in the jackpot gaming state), and the ease of winning on the variable winning hole 316 (outroll rate in the jackpot gaming state) Is an indicator that Therefore, by evaluating the ball out performance based on a plurality of performance information including the continuous character ratio, since the ball out performance in the jackpot gaming state is reflected, it is possible to more appropriately suggest the ball out performance It will be possible.

  In addition, the character ratio is the total payout due to the winnings to all winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) where there is a payout of the winning balls as described above In the number of balls, it is a ratio that the number of total paid-out balls accounts for the number of the second winning opening and paying off balls and the number of the variable winning opening and paying out balls. In other words, the prize ratio is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot (stay ratio of jackpot gaming state), stay ratio of time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), and variable winning opening 316 and It is an index showing the ease of winning in the second winning opening 315 (out-rolling rate in the jackpot gaming state). Therefore, by evaluating the ball out performance based on a plurality of performance information including the character ratio, since the ball out performance in the jackpot gaming state and the time saving game state is reflected, the ball out performance is suggested more appropriately It will be possible to

  Furthermore, in addition to or in place of one of the above-described out-dump performance, it is output as a out-dump performance in addition to the above-mentioned out-dump performance (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous character ratio or character ratio). The ball expectation value may be suggested. Here, the expected value of payout balls is, for example, the number of payout balls (payout gaming ball balls) expected with respect to the total number of launched gaming balls (total number of out balls) when striking a predetermined number of gaming balls (for example, 60,000 balls). Number). Expected payout number is 100% when the total number of projected gaming balls (total out ball number) and the expected number of payout balls (disbursed gaming ball number) is 100%, and the expected number of payout balls (disbursed game number When the number of balls is larger than 100%, the number of expected balls (the number of balls to be paid out) is smaller than 100%. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the expected value of the payout exceeds 100%, and the higher the value, the higher the payout performance. On the other hand, it is disadvantageous for the player when the expected value of the payout is less than 100%, and the lower the numerical value, the lower the payout performance.

  Also, the expected number of payouts (payout ball number) is the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variation gaming state (high It can be calculated from the theoretical ratio of probability mode and high frequency support mode) and jackpot gaming state, and the theoretical number of balls in each gaming state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each gaming state is, for example, the game setting value (the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode (refer to FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B)), the distribution ratio of the jackpot type It is calculated based on the unit jackpot lottery number, the feature ratio and the like shown in FIG. 7 (C). Further, the expected number of payouts (the number of paid-out game balls) expected in the normal gaming state is calculated based on, for example, the number of lotteries, the base, and the like. The expected number of payouts (the number of paid out gaming balls) other than the normal gaming state (time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state and jackpot gaming state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of times per first hit, distribution ratio of big hit type 7 (C)), the number of theoretical balls in each jackpot type, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, and the like.

  In addition, the expected value of the output ball may be evaluated as the fulfillment rate for the border line. Here, the borderline is the number of jackpots required for a lending ball per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to make the expected value of the payout 100%, and this borderline is a jackpot lottery probability It is calculated on the assumption that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes the jackpot in the street. That is, the borderline is the number of jackpot lottery numbers per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in which the ball is ± 0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. In addition, although various calculation methods of the border line are proposed, for example, the border line can be calculated as the number of lending balls at 1000 yen / (the average number of playing balls in the jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls for 1000 yen is generally 250. Also, the average number of payouts in the jackpot game is the number of payouts per jackpot game per round when the number of round games in the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. Further, the total probability is an average jackpot winning probability when the high probability mode and the low probability mode are assigned as theoretical values. Then, the fullness rate for the border line is calculated as a ratio between the number of lottery with a unit jackpot and the border line. If the fulfillment rate of this borderline exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous it is for the player, and if it is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous for the player. For example, in the case where the number of lotteries is 18 and the borderline is 20, the fulfillment rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

  As described above, since the dispensing performance is evaluated based on the expected value (including the border line), it is possible to evaluate the dispensing performance in consideration of the state of the nail and the surface properties of the game board 31, so It is possible to suggest more appropriately.

  In addition, in the case of suggesting three or more balls out of the plurality of balls, it is preferable to combine indicators having different properties to indicate the ball performance. For example, the game setting value regarding the jackpot probability, the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers (or base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio) for each winning opening 313 to 316, jackpot expectation regarding the winning probability and each winning opening 313 to 316 It is preferable to combine the value and to indicate the ball performance. For example, in the case where the game setting value is suggested by the character as in the present embodiment and the jackpot lottery number is simply suggested by the character mode, it is also suggested that the ball performance is indicated by the character mode also for the expected ball withdrawal value. preferable. In other words, when suggesting three or more balls out performance, suggesting three or more balls out performance by one character (suggested object) rather than suggesting three or more balls separately performance with multiple characters etc. Is preferred.

<Step S2411>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, when the value of the jackpot lottery counter is not 0 (step S2402: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the suggested image displaying flag set to on at step S2410 is set to on. (Step S2411). The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S 2412 when the suggestion image display in-progress flag is set to on (step S 2411: Yes), and sets the suggestion image display in-progress flag to off (step S 2411: No) , The said output ball performance suggestion image display process is complete | finished.

<Steps S2412 and S2413>
When the suggestion image display flag is set to ON (step S2411: Yes), the MPU 51 hides the pop-out performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38 (step S2412), and the suggestion image The flag under display is set to OFF (step S2413), and the processing for displaying the performance with a selected ball is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the processing for displaying the out-dump performance shown when the variation pattern command is received, every time the number of fluctuation games reaches 1000, the out-dump performance suggestion image starts from the start of the fluctuation game. An example has been described in which the pop-up performance suggestion image is not displayed when displayed on the image display unit 38 and the next variable game is started. That is, the sub-image display unit 38 is used as an image display unit for displaying a pop-out performance suggestion image. Therefore, while the variable game effect informing the lottery result in the big hit lottery is executed in the symbol display portion 341, the payout performance suggestion image is displayed in the sub image display portion 38, whereby the player can perform the payout performance. It is possible to prevent the suggestion image from being mistaken as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of change game has reached 1000 times, the ball distraction performance suggestion image is continuously displayed on the sub image display unit 38 at least from the start to the end of the change game. Although the case has been described, it is not necessary to display continuously from the start to the end of the change game. For example, when a super reach effect pattern or a special reach effect pattern is selected as the effect pattern, while the basic effect (non-reach effect) from the start of fluctuation to the development of normal reach effect is being performed (from the start of fluctuation) The submersible ball performance suggestion image is limited to the sub image display section 38 by limiting it to the end of the basic effect, or from the start of the change to the development of the super reach effect (from the start of the change to the end of the normal reach effect). It may be displayed. In this case, while the super reach effect or the special reach effect is being performed, the sub image display unit 38 can execute the variable game effect together with the symbol display unit 341. If the sub image display unit 38 executes the variable game effect during the execution of the super reach effect or the special reach effect, an image of the variable game effect may be displayed as an upper layer of the ball performance suggested image, An image of a variable game effect may be displayed after the performance suggestion image is not displayed. In addition, in the variation game in which the ball output performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38, when the sub image display unit 38 has selected an effect pattern in which an effect with a high degree of expectation or the like is executed, the sub image display The display of the pop-up performance suggestion image in the part 38 may be carried over to the next and subsequent fluctuation games of the fluctuation game and may be executed.

[Big hit game production decision processing]
In the jackpot game effect determination process executed in step S2308 of the command determination process of FIG. 31, an opening effect, an ending effect, and an open / close execution mode effect performed in the jackpot game are determined. Here, FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2501, an opening effect determination process is performed in which the MPU 51 determines an opening effect to be performed between the start of the jackpot game and the start of the opening / closing execution mode. In the opening effect determination process, a rank suggestion image suggesting the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number may be determined together with the opening basic effect indicating that the jackpot game is to be started.

  The opening basic effect is determined according to the value of the opening (OP) basic effect type counter based on the opening basic effect selection table defined for each game setting value. In the opening basic effect, the game setting value suggesting character may be displayed as in the case of displaying the ball-out performance suggestion image in the variable game effect. In addition, the game setting value suggested character types and the game setting values suggested by each game setting value suggested character are the same as the game setting value suggested characters in the variable game effect. However, in the present embodiment, as the game setting value suggesting character type, “Jugon” that indicates that the game setting value is even and “shark” that indicates that the game setting value is odd are included. No, the game setting value suggested character type is "Sam" which indicates that the game setting value is 4, "Marin" which indicates that the game setting value is 3, and it is suggested that the game setting value is 2. There are four types, "Warin" and "Urin", which suggests that the game setting value is one.

  Here, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the opening basic effect selection table to be referred to in the opening effect determining process.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the opening basic effect selection table, "no suggestion" is most easily selected as the opening basic effect, regardless of whether the game setting value is any of 1 to 4. Here, “no suggestion” is an effect different from the effect in which four types of game setting value suggesting characters suggesting game setting values are displayed as the opening basic effect (effect in which the game setting value suggesting character is not displayed). Means to be performed. That is, in the variable gaming state, the withdrawal performance suggestive effect is executed on the specific condition that the unit jackpot lottery number reaches 1000 times, but at the opening of the big hit game, the lottery based on the opening basic effect selection table is won With the specific condition, a pop-out performance suggestive presentation is executed. Then, in the opening basic effect selection table, “no suggestion” is set most easily to be selected, so that it is prevented that the player easily recognizes the game setting value in the big hit game. As a result, when the game setting value is a low setting value disadvantageous to the player, the player can be prevented from moving to another game machine 10 in a short time. Then, as the game setting value is a high setting value advantageous to the player (as the jackpot winning probability is higher), "no suggestion" is more easily selected. That is, the game setting value suggested character is more difficult to be displayed as the game setting value is higher. This makes it difficult to recognize that the game setting value is the high setting value, and allows the player to proceed with the game while maintaining an expectation that the game setting value is the high setting value.

  In addition, as the opening basic effect selection table, a performance information display image may be always displayed in the opening effect by adopting a table having no distribution of “no indication”, and “no indication is given in each game setting value. A table may be adopted in which the probability that “is selected is the same.

  In addition, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is easy to be selected next to "no suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Sam", and when the game setting value is 3, "Suggested" “Marin” is easy to be selected next to “No”, other characters are more difficult to select than “Marin”, and if the game setting value is 2, “warin” is easy to be selected next to “No suggestion”, “ Other characters are more difficult to select than Warin ', and when the game setting value is 1,' Urin 'is more likely to be selected next to' no suggestion ', and the other characters are more difficult to select than' Urin '.

  As described above, with regard to the game setting value suggesting character, "Sam" is a character which is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 4 and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4. Also, since "Sam" is not distributed (not selected) at game setting value 1, game setting value 1 is negated when "Sum" is displayed in the opening effect, and game setting value 2 or more is determined. . In that sense, "Sam" in the opening effect is a character that determines that the game setting value is 2 or more.

  Also, "Marine" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 3, and indicates that the game setting value is 3, and "Warin" is easily selected when the game setting value is 2. The character is a character that suggests that the setting value is 2, and "Urin" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 1, and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1. The higher the game setting value is, the lower the probability that the game setting value suggesting character suggesting the game setting value is selected is. Specifically, the selection rate of "Sam" when the game setting value is 4 is 10/100, and the selection rate of "Marine" when the game setting value is 3 is 15/100, so The selection rate of "warin" when the setting value is 2 is 20/100, and the selection rate of "urin" when the game setting value is 1 is 25/100. As described above, when the game setting value is the high setting value, it is difficult for the character indicating the high setting value to be displayed in the opening effect. Thereby, in the opening effect, even if a character indicating that the game setting value is the low setting value is displayed when the game setting value is the high setting value, the game setting value is immediately the low setting value. It is difficult to judge. As a result, it is possible to advance the game while maintaining the player's expectation that the game setting value is the high setting value.

  Note that as the opening basic effect selection table, a table may be adopted in which the probability that a game setting value suggesting character suggesting that the game setting value is set is the same for each game setting value.

  On the other hand, the rank suggestion image is determined in accordance with the value of the rank suggestion image type counter based on the unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table defined for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number. Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the rank suggestion image type, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the opening unit jackpot suggestion number of times suggested image selection table.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the rank suggestion image includes images of whales of a plurality of modes (hereinafter, “jie lucky”). Specifically, as the rank suggestion images, six kinds of "jujukuji lucky", "GOLD lottery lucky", "GOO lottery lucky", "normal lottery lucky", "BAD lottery lucky" and "BLACK lottery lucky" Includes an image. "Kotobuki lottery" is an image that clearly indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S" (25 or more). “GOLD lottery lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of times the unit jackpot lottery is “rank S”. “GOO lottery lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is “rank A” (more than 20 times and less than 25 times). “Normal lottery lucky” is an image that suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is “rank B” (more than 15 times and less than 20 times). "BAD lottery" is an image that suggests that the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is "rank C" (10 times or more and less than 15 times). “BLACK lottery lucky” is an image indicating that the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is “rank D” (less than 10).

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the opening unit jackpot winning count suggested image selection table, rank suggestion images are defined in accordance with the opening rank suggestion image type counter for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number. In the unit jackpot lottery number suggested image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank S”, “GOLD lottery lucky” is most easily selected, and it is difficult to select lottery lucky of other modes. When the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank A”, “GOO lottery lucky” is most easily selected, and the lottery lucky of other modes is hard to be selected. When the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank B”, “normal lottery lucky” is most easily selected, and it is difficult to select lottery lucky of other modes. If the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank C”, “BAD lottery lucky” is most easily selected, and the lottery lucky of other modes is hard to be selected. When the unit jackpot lottery number of times is “rank D”, “BKACK lottery lucky” is most easily selected, and the lottery lucky of other modes is hard to be selected. In addition, “Kotobuki lottery” is distributed only when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank S”.

  As described above, “Kotobuki lottery” is a rank suggestion image that is selected only when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank S”, and clearly indicates that it is “rank S”. “GOLD lottery lucky” is a rank suggestion image that is easy to be selected when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank S”, and is a rank suggestion image that suggests “rank S”. “GOO lottery lucky” is a rank suggestion image that is easy to be selected when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank A”, and is a “rank A” suggestion image. “Normal lottery lucky” is a rank suggestion image that is easy to be selected when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank B”, and is a rank suggestion image that suggests “rank B”. “BAD lottery lucky” is a rank suggestion image that is easily selected when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank C”, and is a rank suggestion image that suggests “rank C”. “BLACK lottery lucky” is a rank suggestion image that suggests that it is easy to be selected when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank D”, and indicates “rank D”.

  Here, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the opening screen in the jackpot game. In the opening screen shown in FIG. 44 (A), it is suggested that the game setting value is 4 by displaying “Sam” as the game setting value suggesting character as the opening basic effect, and “Kotobuki Luckye as a rank suggestion image It is determined that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S" by displaying "." Further, on the opening screen shown in FIG. 44 (B), it is suggested that the game setting value is 2 by displaying “warin” as the game setting value suggesting character as the opening basic effect, and “BLACK as the rank indication image. It is suggested that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank D" by the display of the lottery lucky.

<Step S2502>
Referring back to FIG. 40, in step S2502, the MPU 51 executes ending effect determination processing for determining an ending effect to be executed between the end of the open / close execution mode and the end of the jackpot game. In the ending effect determination process, together with the ending basic effect indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, a rank suggestion image that suggests a rank of the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is determined. The process of determining the rank suggestion image in the ending effect is performed in the same manner as the opening effect determination process in step S2502 described above.

  Here, FIG. 45 (A) is a view showing an example of the ending basic effect selection table used in the ending effect determination process, and FIG. 45 (B) is an example of the unit jackpot suggestion number selection image selection table for the ending effect. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (A), in the variation game state, the pop-out performance suggestion effect is executed with a specific condition that the unit jackpot lottery number reaches 1000 times, but in the ending effect determination process, it is a big hit game Similar to the opening, the pop-up performance suggestion effect is executed under a specific condition of winning the lottery based on the ending basic effect selection table. Then, in the opening basic effect selection table, as the ending basic effect, "no suggestion" is most easily selected, regardless of which of the game setting values is 1 to 4. Here, "no suggestion" is a different effect (a game setting value suggesting character is not displayed) different from an effect in which four types of game setting value suggesting characters suggesting a game setting value are displayed as in the opening basic effect. ) Means to be performed. As described above, "no suggestion" is most easily selected, which prevents the player from easily recognizing the game setting value in the jackpot game. As a result, when the game setting value is a low setting value disadvantageous to the player, the player can be prevented from moving to another game machine 10 in a short time. Then, as the game setting value is a high setting value advantageous to the player (as the jackpot winning probability is higher), "no suggestion" is more easily selected. That is, the game setting value suggested character is more difficult to be displayed as the game setting value is higher. This makes it difficult to recognize that the game setting value is the high setting value, and allows the player to proceed with the game while maintaining an expectation that the game setting value is the high setting value.

  In addition, as the ending basic effect selection table, a performance information display image may be always displayed in the ending effect by adopting a table having no distribution of “no indication”, and “no indication is given in each game setting value. A table may be adopted in which the probability that “is selected is the same.

  In addition, when the game setting value is 4, "Sam" is easy to be selected next to "no suggestion", and other characters are less likely to be selected than "Sam", and when the game setting value is 3, "Suggested" “Marin” is easy to be selected next to “No”, other characters are more difficult to select than “Marin”, and if the game setting value is 2, “warin” is easy to be selected next to “No suggestion”, “ Other characters are more difficult to select than Warin ', and when the game setting value is 1,' Urin 'is more likely to be selected next to' no suggestion ', and the other characters are more difficult to select than' Urin '. Moreover, there is distribution of "all members" only when the game setting value is 4. When this "all members" is selected, all members of the game setting value suggestion character are displayed on the ending screen.

  As described above, with regard to the game setting value suggesting character, "Sam" is a character which is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 4 and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 4. Also, since "Sam" is not distributed (not selected) at game setting value 1, game setting value 1 is negated when "Sum" is displayed in ending effect, and game setting value 2 or more is decided . In that sense, the "Sam" in the ending effect is a character that determines that the game setting value is 2 or more.

  Also, "Marine" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 3, and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 3, and "Warin" is easily selected when the game setting value is 2. The character is a character that suggests that the setting value is 2, and "Urin" is a character that is easy to be selected when the game setting value is 1, and is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1. The higher the game setting value is, the lower the probability that the game setting value suggesting character suggesting the game setting value is selected is. Specifically, the selection rate of “Sum” when the game setting value is 4 is 15/110, and the selection rate of “Marine” when the game setting value is 3 is 20/110, The selection rate of "warin" when the setting value is 2 is 25/110, and the selection rate of "urin" when the game setting value is 1 is 30/110. As described above, when the game setting value is the high setting value, it is difficult for the character indicating the high setting value to be displayed in the ending effect. Thereby, in the ending effect, even if a character indicating that the game setting value is the low setting value is displayed when the game setting value is the high setting value, the game setting value is immediately the low setting value. It is difficult to judge. As a result, it is possible to advance the game while maintaining the player's expectation that the game setting value is the high setting value.

  Note that as the ending basic effect selection table, a table may be adopted in which the probability that the game setting value suggesting character suggesting that the game setting value is set is selected is the same for each game setting value.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (B), in the ending effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, a rank suggestion image is defined according to the ending rank suggestion image type counter for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number . In this unit jackpot lottery number suggested image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank S”, “GOLD lottery lucky” is most easily selected, and when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank A”, “GOO "Budget Lucky" is most easily selected, and "Normal lottery Lucky" is most easily selected when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank B", and "BAD lottery lucky" when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank C". “Is the easiest to select, and“ BKACK lottery lucky ”is the easiest to select when the unit jackpot lottery number is“ rank D ”. In addition, “Kotobuki lottery” is distributed only when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank S”.

  As described above, in the unit for winning effect for winning effect, the number-of-lots drawing frequency suggestion image selection table, similarly to the unit for winning character for opening presentation, the number-of-lots drawing frequency suggested image selection table Clearly indicate that "GOLD lottery lucky" indicates that the number of winning lotteries is "rank S", "GOO lottery lucky" indicates that the number of winnings for unit jackpot is "rank A", "normal "Legacy" indicates that the number of winning lotteries is "Rank B", "BAD lottery" indicates that the number of lotting lottery is "Rank C", and "Lacky Lucky" indicates the number of winnings It is a rank suggestion image that suggests that the number of times of drawing is “rank D”.

  Here, FIG. 46 is a view showing an example of the ending screen in the jackpot game. In the ending screen shown in FIG. 46 (A), it is clearly indicated that the game setting value is 4 by displaying “all members” as the game setting value suggesting character as the ending basic effect, and “normal game lucky” as the rank suggestion image It is suggested that the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank B” by displaying “.” In the ending screen shown in FIG. 46 (B), it is suggested that the game setting value is 3 by displaying "Marine" as the game setting value suggesting character as the ending basic effect, and "GOO lottery lucky" as a rank suggestion image It is suggested that the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank A” by displaying “.”

<Step S2503>
Referring back to FIG. 40, in step S2503, the MPU 51 determines an open / close execution mode effect scenario to be executed in the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode effect scenario defines a combination of round game effects executed in each round game in the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the rendering scenario is determined based on the open / close execution mode rendering scenario table (see FIGS. 47 and 48) described later. Further, the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario includes an effect scenario for displaying the performance information display image on the symbol display portion 341 in a predetermined round game. Then, when the effect scenario in which the ball withdrawal performance suggestion image is displayed as the open / close execution mode effect scenario is determined, a round game character selection table (see FIG. 49 (FIG. Based on the A) reference) and the round game unit jackpot lottery number suggested image selection table (see FIG. 49 (B)), a ball-out performance suggested image to be displayed in the corresponding round is determined.

  Here, FIGS. 47 and 48 are diagrams showing an example of the open / close execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the open / close execution mode effect determination process. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A) is a 5R normal jackpot open mode execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot, and FIG. (B) is a 5R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is 5R probability variation big hit. FIG. 48 is a 16R probability variation big hit opening / closing execution mode effect scenario selection table used in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination process when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is 16R probability variation big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (A), the 5R normal big hit open / close execution mode effect scenario selection table is a production scenario executed in the open / close execution mode in the big hit game when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is 5R normal big hit. To define. In the 5R normal jackpot execution mode rendering scenario selection table, a rendering scenario is determined according to the value of the rendering scenario type counter. Here, “o” in the 5R normal jackpot execution mode presentation scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the rendering scenario type counter is 0 to 4, the rendering scenario in which the pop-out ball performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, and if the value of the rendering scenario type counter is 5 to 9, the popping ball in 2 rounds A presentation scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the presentation scenario type counter has a value of 10 to 14, a presentation scenario in which a ball withdrawal performance presentation image is displayed in three rounds is determined, and the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 15 A presentation scenario in which the pop-out ball performance suggestion image is displayed in 4 rounds is determined in ~ 19, and a presentation scenario in which the pop-out ball performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds is determined in the presentation scenario type counter of 20 to 24 . When the value of the rendering scenario type counter is 25 to 79, a rendering scenario in which the ball-outset performance suggestion image is not displayed is determined. In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, when the effect scenario selected by the lottery has a round game in which a pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed, the pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game Be done. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R normal jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed by lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the 5R probability variation big opening and closing execution mode effect scenario selection table is a presentation scenario executed in the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variation jackpot To define. In this 5R probability variation big hit opening and closing execution mode rendering scenario selection table, the rendering scenario is determined according to the value of the rendering scenario type counter. Here, “o” in the 5R probability variation big hit opening and closing execution mode rendering scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 0 to 4 or 25 to 29, the presentation scenario in which the pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, and the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 5 to 9 or 30 A presentation scenario in which the pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed in 2 rounds is determined in ~ 34, and a presentation scenario in which the pop-up performance suggestion picture is displayed in 3 rounds when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 10 to 14 or 35 to 39 If the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 15 to 19 or 40 to 44, the presentation scenario in which the ball performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in four rounds, and the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 20 to 24 or 45 to In 49, a rendering scenario in which the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in five rounds. When the value of the effect scenario type counter is 50 to 79, the effect scenario in which the ball-out performance suggestive image is not displayed is determined. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R probability variation big hit game, when the effect scenario selected by the lottery has a round game in which a pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed, the pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game Be done. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of the 5R probability variation big hit game, it is determined whether or not the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed by lottery.

  As can be seen by comparing FIG. 47 (A) and FIG. 47 (B), in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the probability that the pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed is high compared to the 5R regular jackpot. In this way, in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot, it is possible to make the player who is not paying attention to the round game orientation notice the round game orientation from the relief feeling of being the probability variation jackpot. In addition, in the case of 5R probability variation jackpot, the probability that the ball will be displayed may be lower than that of 5R probability variation jackpot, or may be the same probability as 5R regular jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the 16R probability variation big hit opening and closing execution scenario effect selection table defines the production scenario executed in the opening and closing execution mode in the big hit game when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is the 16 R probability variation big hit . In this 16R probability variation big hit opening and closing execution mode rendering scenario selection table, the rendering scenario is determined according to the value of the rendering scenario type counter. Here, “o” in the 16R probability variation big hit opening and closing execution mode rendering scenario selection table indicates a round game in which a pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed. Specifically, when the value of the rendering scenario type counter is 0 to 4, the rendering scenario in which the pop-out ball performance suggestion image is displayed in one round is determined, and if the value of the rendering scenario type counter is 5 to 9, the popping ball in 2 rounds A presentation scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the presentation scenario type counter has a value of 10 to 14, a presentation scenario in which a ball withdrawal performance presentation image is displayed in three rounds is determined, and the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 15 A presentation scenario in which the ball withdrawal performance suggestion image is displayed in 4 rounds is determined in ~ 19, and a presentation scenario in which the ball withdrawal performance suggestion image is displayed in 5 rounds with the value of the presentation scenario type counter of 20 to 24 is determined When the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 25-29, the presentation scenario in which the ball with the ball withdrawal performance indication is displayed is determined in six rounds, and the presentation scenario type is determined. When the value of the counter is 30 to 34, the presentation scenario in which the pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed in 7 rounds is determined, and when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 35 to 39, the pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed in 8 rounds A scenario is determined, and if the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 40 to 44, the presentation scenario in which the pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 9 rounds, and if the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 45 to 49, the withdrawal balls in 10 rounds The presentation scenario in which the performance suggestion image is displayed is determined, and when the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 50 to 54, the presentation scenario in which the ball withdrawal performance suggestion image is displayed in 11 rounds is determined, and the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 55 A presentation scenario in which the pop-up ball performance suggestion image is displayed in 12 rounds is determined in ~ 59, and the presentation scenario type counter In 60 to 64, the presentation scenario in which the pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed in 13 rounds is determined, and in the presentation scenario type counter value of 65 to 69, the presentation scenario in which the pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed in 14 rounds is determined If the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 70 to 74, the presentation scenario in which the pop-out ball performance suggestion image is displayed is determined in 15 rounds, and if the value of the presentation scenario type counter is 75 to 79, the pop-up ball performance suggestion image in 16 rounds The rendering scenario in which the is displayed is determined.

  In the 16R probability variation big hit opening and closing execution mode rendering scenario selection table, a popped ball performance suggestion image is always displayed in any of the 1R to 16R round games. As a result, it is possible to make players who are not focused on the round game effects pay attention to the round game effects from the feeling of relief that they are the probability variation jackpot. In addition, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, as in the case of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, a rendering scenario may be determined in which the pop-out ball performance suggestion image is not displayed.

  Here, FIG. 49 (A) is a view showing an example of a round game character selection table used when a presentation scenario in which a pop-out ball performance suggestion image is displayed in the opening / closing execution mode presentation determination process is selected. 49 (B) is a view showing an example of a round game effect unit jackpot lottery number suggested image selection table used when a presentation scenario in which a ball withdrawal performance suggestion image is displayed in the opening / closing execution mode production determination process is selected is there.

  As shown in FIG. 49A, in the round game character selection table, "Sam" is most easily selected when the game setting value is 4, and "Marin" is most easily selected when the game setting value is 3. When the game setting value is 2, "Warin" is most easily selected, and when the game setting value is 1, "Urin" is most easily selected. As described above, also in the round game effect, "Sam" indicates that the game setting value is 4, and "Marin" indicates that the game setting value is 3, as in the opening effect and the ending effect. , "Warin" indicates that the game setting value is 2, "Urin" is a character that suggests that the game setting value is 1.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (B), in the round game effect unit jackpot lottery number suggestion image selection table, a rank suggestion image is defined according to the round game rank suggestion image type counter for each rank of the unit jackpot lottery number ing. In this unit jackpot lottery number suggested image selection table, when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank S”, “GOLD lottery lucky” is most easily selected, and when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank A”, “GOO "Budget Lucky" is most easily selected, and "Normal lottery Lucky" is most easily selected when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank B", and "BAD lottery lucky" when the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank C". Is the most likely to be selected, and "BKACK lottery" is the most likely to be selected. In addition, “Kotobuki lottery” is distributed only when the unit jackpot lottery number is “rank S”.

  As described above, in the round game effect unit big hit lottery number suggested image selection table, similarly to the opening effect unit big hit lottery number suggested image selection table and the ending effect unit big hit lottery frequency suggested image selection table, "Kotobuki lucky" Indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S", "GOLD lottery lucky" indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "rank S", "GOO lottery lucky" is the unit jackpot lottery number "Normal A" is suggested, "Normal lottery lucky" indicates that the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank B", and "BAD lottery" is the unit jackpot lottery number is "Rank C" Suggesting that “BLACK lottery lucky” has a “rank D” number of wins for the unit jackpot. And has a suggested rank suggested image.

  Here, FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the round game screen in the jackpot game. In the round game screen shown in FIG. 50 (A), a scenario in which a ball withdrawal performance suggestion image is displayed in the fifth round game round is selected as the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario, and "Marine" is selected as the game setting value suggestion character. By being displayed, it is suggested that the game setting value is 3, and by displaying "GOLD lottery lucky" as a rank suggestion image, it is suggested that the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is "rank S". Further, in the round game screen shown in FIG. 46 (B), a scenario in which a pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed in the second round game round is selected as the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario, and By being displayed, it is suggested that a game setting value is 4, and it is clearly indicated that the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is "rank S" by displaying "Kotobuki lucky" as a rank suggestion image. There is.

<Step S2504>
Referring back to FIG. 40, in step S2504, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot game effect determined in steps S2501 to S2503 in the RAM 512. Specifically, the MPU 51 stores in the RAM 512 the opening basic effect type determined in step S2501, the ending basic effect type determined in step S2502, and the open / close execution mode effect scenario type determined in step S2503. In this case, the kind-out performance indication image type to be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in the opening, opening / closing execution mode or ending is stored. Thereby, in the big hit game, the voice output effect is executed by the speaker 26, and the lamp effect is executed by the electric decoration portion 27.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 a jackpot game effect command indicating the contents of the jackpot game effect determined in steps S2501 to S2503. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the opening basic effect type determined in step S 2501, the contents of the pop-out performance suggestion image to be executed in the opening effect as necessary, the ending basic effect type determined in step S 2502, and Depending on the contents and the number of execution rounds of the ball out performance indication suggested by the opening effect, and the open / close execution mode rendering scenario type determined in step S2503, if necessary The content is transmitted to the display control device 6. Thereby, in the jackpot game, the image display including the ball-out performance suggestion image is executed by the symbol display section 341.

  In the present embodiment, the player can confirm the ball-out performance indication image displayed on the sub-image display unit 38 by displaying the ball-out performance indication image suggesting ball-out performance in the jackpot game. While being able to concentrate on a jackpot game, it is possible to infer and enjoy the ball performance by the ball performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the jackpot game, the ball performance suggestion image may be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in any of the opening, the opening / closing execution mode and the ending. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the jackpot game effect from the start to the end of the jackpot game. As described above, by making the player pay attention to the jackpot game effect, it is possible to convey the goodness of the jackpot game effect to the player regarding the jackpot game effect which is likely to be neglected by the player.

  In the jackpot game, the ball performance suggestion image may be displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in any of the opening, opening / closing execution mode and ending, but it is out in only one of the opening, opening / closing execution mode and ending. The ball performance suggestion image may be displayed on the sub image display unit 38.

  In addition, when suggesting the withdrawal performance in the big hit game, as in the case of the variable game, in place of one or both of the game setting value and the number of unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous prize ratio, prize ratio, It is also possible to indicate the ball performance based on the ball expected value and the borderline fulfillment rate. That is, the payout performance suggested in the jackpot game is not limited to the combination of the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number.

[Fluctuation game production processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 27, in the fluctuation game effect processing (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt processing, in the fluctuation game informing the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, when the fluctuation pattern command is received, the command judgment processing of FIG. The variable game effect according to the effect pattern determined in step S2303 is executed by the symbol display portion 341, the speaker 26, the electric decoration portion 27 or the like, and the output ball performance suggestion image determined in step S2304 is the sub image display portion 38 To be executed.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing, the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 40 are executed. Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect processing.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2309 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON, and the jackpot game effect If the start flag is on (step S2601: YES), the process proceeds to step S2602, and if the jackpot gaming effect start flag is off (step S2601: NO), the process proceeds to step S2604.

<Steps S2602 and S2603>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag off (step S2602) and executes the opening effect start process (step S2603), and the jackpot game is performed. End the rendering process. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the electric decoration 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2501 in the big hit game effect determining process of FIG. An opening effect start command to start the image display of the symbol display portion 341 is transmitted. Thereby, in the symbol display section 341, an image corresponding to the opening basic effect is displayed, and when it is determined that the pop-out performance suggestion image is to be displayed, the pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 Be done.

<Step S2604>
In step S2604, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag set to ON in step S2311 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON, and the round game effect start flag is ON. (Step S2604: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S2605, and when the open / close execution mode start flag is off (Step S2604: No), the process proceeds to Step S2607.

<Steps S2605 and S2606>
If the round game effect start flag is on (step S2604: YES), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag off (step S2605) and executes the round game effect start process (step S2606), and the jackpot The game effect processing ends. In the round game effect start process, the MPU 51 executes the round game effect in the corresponding round in the open / close execution mode effect scenario determined in step S2503 in the big hit game effect determination process of FIG. At the same time, a round game start command to cause the symbol display portion 341 to start an image effect as a round game effect in the corresponding round is transmitted to the display control device 6. The round game start command includes round number information indicating the number of rounds. Thereby, in the symbol display section 341, an image corresponding to the opening basic effect is displayed, and when it is determined that the pop-out performance suggestion image is to be displayed, the pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 Be done.

<Step S2607>
In step S2607, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending start flag set to on in step S2314 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to on, and the ending start flag is on (step S2607: Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S2608, and when the ending start flag is off (step S2607: No), the process proceeds to step S2610.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
If the ending start flag is on (step S2607: YES), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag off (step S2608), and executes ending effect start processing (step S2609), and ends the jackpot game effect processing. Do. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the electric decoration unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in step S2502 in the big hit game effect determination process of FIG. The ending effect start command to cause the symbol display portion 341 to start the image effect of is transmitted. Thereby, in the symbol display section 341, an image corresponding to the ending basic effect is displayed, and when it is determined that the output performance suggestion image is to be displayed, the output display in the symbol display section 341 is displayed Be done.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to ON in step S2316 in the command determination process of FIG. 31 is set to ON, and the jackpot game effect end flag is ON ( Step S2610: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2611, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2610: No), the jackpot game effect process is ended.

<Steps S2611 and S2612>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag off (step S2611) and executes the ending effect end process (step S2612), and the jackpot game is performed. End the rendering process.

  By the way, the player selects a gaming machine based on each reason, and plays a game in the gaming machine. Then, the payout performance of the gaming machine can be mentioned as one criterion when the player selects the gaming machine. The payout ball performance is affected by the ease of winning in the first start winning opening and the general winning hole, that is, the frequency with which the jackpot lottery can be received, and the payout rate. On the other hand, the ease of winning on the first start winning opening and the general winning opening is affected by the physical state of the gaming machine, for example, the state of nails placed on the game board, the surface characteristics of the game board, etc. . Here, the nails placed on the game board have individual differences among gaming machines at the shipping stage. In addition, the condition of the nail changes over time, and individual differences also exist among gaming machines with respect to the degree of this over-time change. In addition, with regard to the surface quality of the game board, there are individual differences in the shipping stage and the secular change among the gaming machines. Therefore, even between the same type of game machines manufactured at the same time and installed in the same hole at the same time, the ease of winning in the first start winning opening and the general winning opening differs. Since the physical state of such a gaming machine can be confirmed from the outside, the player confirms the ball withdrawal performance by confirming the physical state of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is presumed to have high ball withdrawal performance. It is possible to select and play a game.

  On the other hand, as gaming machines, there are gaming machines in which the gaming hall side can set the jackpot probability from the jackpot probability (game setting value) of a plurality of stages. In such a gaming machine, even if the out-dump performance based on the ease of winning on the first start winning opening and the general winning opening is low, if the jackpot probability is set high, the jackpot game is Due to the large number of balls, the total ball performance may be high. On the other hand, even if the out-dump performance based on the ease of winning on the first start winning opening and the general winning opening is high, if the jackpot probability is set low, the jackpot game will be issued There may be cases in which the total ball out performance is low due to the small number of balls. In addition, on the game hall side, there is a possibility that nail adjustments may be made so that the game ball is unlikely to win the first start winning opening or the general winning opening while increasing the game setting value. Therefore, in the gaming machine in which the gaming hall side can set the jackpot probability from the jackpot probability (game setting value) of a plurality of stages, it is advantageous to the player to have an advantageous ball performance only by confirming the physical state of the gaming machine from the outside. It can not be judged whether it is a gaming machine.

  In addition, the jackpot probability (game setting value) is difficult to converge with a small number of trials, may win a jackpot with a probability higher than the actual jackpot probability, but wins a jackpot with a probability lower than the actual jackpot probability Sometimes. In addition, the easiness of winning of the game ball to the first winning opening etc. is also difficult to converge in a short game, and variations occur. As a result, the game is closed in a short time and moved to another game machine in spite of the high payout performance, and conversely, the game is continued for a long time despite the low payout performance. Things can happen.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the variable game and the big hit game, a pop-out performance suggestion image suggesting the pop-up performance may be displayed on the sub image display unit 38. Here, the payout performance suggestion image is selected based on a plurality of indicators including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the gaming machine 10. Therefore, the player confirms the payout ball performance suggestion image displayed on the sub image display unit 38, based on a plurality of indicators including the jackpot probability and the physical state of the gaming machine 10, of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to estimate the outdated ball performance, and to determine the outdated ball performance individually for each of a plurality of indicators. As a result, the player can enjoy the inference of the payout performance of the gaming machine 10, so the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, for a player who selects the gaming machine 10 based on the ball withdrawal performance, the player may move to another game machine with a closeout in a short time despite the fact that the ball withdrawal performance is high, or the ball withdrawal performance It is possible to suppress the continuation of the game for a long time despite the low price.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the payout performance suggestion image in the variation game is performed in the sub image display unit 38, but the display of the withdrawal performance suggestion image in the variation game is performed in the symbol display unit 341 Good. In this case, it is preferable to display a pop-out performance suggestion image at a corner of the symbol display portion 341 such as the lower right corner (see FIG. 52) of the symbol display portion 341 so as not to disturb the visual recognition of the variable game effect. Further, the output ball performance suggesting image is not limited to one whose performance information is suggested by the character type and the character mode type. For example. As shown in FIG. 52, the performance information may be suggested by a combination of the character mode and the words. In the example shown in FIG. 52, the first performance information such as the game setting value is suggested by the speech, and the second performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number is suggested by the character mode . Further, in addition to or in place of displaying the words on the symbol display portion 341, the ball performance may be suggested by the voice effect by the speaker 26.

  In the present embodiment, although the ball-out performance based on the plurality of ball-out information (game setting value and unit jackpot lottery number) is simultaneously suggested by the ball-out performance suggestion image, the ball-out performance suggestion image is each performance information A plurality of images may be included in accordance with (outgoing ball performance). In this case, a plurality of ball withdrawal performance suggestion images may be displayed on the symbol display portion 341, or a plurality of ball withdrawal performance suggestion images may be displayed on the sub image display portion 38, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to display the pop-out ball performance suggestion image on both the symbol display section 341 and the sub-image display section 38. In this manner, the plurality of images corresponding to the performance information (dispensed ball performance) suggest the distributed ball performance, which makes it easy to individually estimate the plurality of distributed ball performances. Therefore, it is easy to determine whether to continue or cancel the game according to the payout performance that the player places importance on selecting a gaming machine.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the first image output performance suggestion image indicating the first ejection performance such as the game setting value is displayed on the sub image display unit 38, and the unit big hit is in the lower right corner of the symbol display unit 341. A second pop-out performance suggestion image suggesting a second pop-out performance, which is first performance information such as the rank of the number of times of drawing, is displayed at the overlapping timing. By displaying the first pop-out performance suggestion image on the sub-image display unit 38 and displaying the second pop-up performance suggestion image on the symbol display unit 341, both the symbol display section 341 and the sub-image display section 38 play games People can be focused on. As a result, the player who is less interested in the game effect is given an opportunity to pay attention to the game effect, and the player can be notified of the fun of the game effect. In addition, the player can display the first pop-up performance suggestion image and the second pop-up performance suggestion image in the same manner by displaying the first pop-up performance suggestion image and the second pop-up performance suggestion image at overlapping timings. Since the timing can be confirmed, it is possible to easily judge the out-dump performance based on the two types of out-dump performance.

  In addition, in the round game effect, the game setting value is suggested by the person character, and the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number is suggested by the aspect of the specific character, but as shown in FIG. The first type of performance information such as game setting values is suggested by the character type to be displayed and introduced, and the second type of performance information different from the first performance information such as the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number is based on the frame color of the character introduction image. It may be suggested. Further, the second performance information may be suggested by the frame pattern of the character introduction image, the background color, and the like.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball game performance suggestion image may be displayed in both the variation game and the jackpot game, but the game performance suggestion image may be displayed in one of the fluctuation game and the jackpot game, In addition to or instead of one or both of the variable game and the jackpot game, the customer may display a pop-out performance suggestion image in a customer wait standby state (a state where the variable display is not held and the game ball is not fired). . For example, in the customer waiting standby state, the ball-out performance suggested image is displayed on the condition that a predetermined operation (long press operation or continuous hit operation) is performed on the operation button 20 and a command is input to the cross key (not shown). It is also conceivable to make it displayed.

  Also, in the variation game, as described above, a pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied. As a specific condition in this case, for example, the number of launched gaming balls reaches a certain number. It is conceivable that the operation on the operation button 20 is performed immediately after the start or the end of the variation game, or that a specific effect is performed. It is preferable that the player does not misunderstand that the specific effect in this case is an effect that suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and for example, an effect that requests the player to hit the left or the right may be considered. . In addition, the specific effect may be an effect such as an effect requiring an operation on the operation button 20. Execution of the pop-out performance suggestion effect when the specific condition is satisfied allows the player to anticipate the timing at which the pop-up performance suggestion effect is executed. As a result, the player can expect the timing at which the ball-out performance suggestion effect is executed, and can proceed with the game while looking forward to the timing, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, in the jackpot game, it is sufficient to display the withdrawal performance suggestion image in at least one of the opening, opening and closing execution mode and ending, and in the opening and closing execution mode, an interval between round games in addition to or instead of round games. You may make it display a withdrawal ball performance suggestion image.

  In addition to or in place of the visual effect, it is also conceivable that the suggestion of the ball-out performance is executed by an audio output effect by the speaker 26 or a lamp effect by the illumination unit 27. For example, it may be suggested that the ball out performance by the type of music (BGM) output in the jackpot game. In addition, it may be possible to suggest the ball out performance by changing the music (BGM) in the middle of the jackpot game. When suggesting the ball withdrawal performance by the change of the music (BGM), even if the player does not check the symbol display portion 341 or the sub image display portion 38, the player outputs the music output from the speaker 26 ( It is possible to estimate the ball performance based on BGM). In addition, because the withdrawal performance suggestion effect is a music change presentation, even for players who are not interested in music (BGM), pay attention to the music (BGM) output from the speaker 26 to estimate the withdrawal performance. It will be possible to entertain and play music (BGM).

  In addition, in the case where a change in music (BGM) indicates a withdrawal performance, the combination of the music before change and the music after change may indicate the withdrawal performance. For example, it is conceivable to suggest a payout performance such as a game setting value according to the music type before change, and to suggest other payout information such as the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers according to the music type after change. If the combination of the pre-change music and the post-change music suggests withdrawal performance, the player not only depends on whether or not a change in music occurs, but also based on a combination of pre- and post-change music. It becomes possible to estimate the performance. As a result, even a player who is not interested in music can be made to focus on the music output from the speaker 26.

  In addition, when suggesting the ball withdrawal performance by the change of the music (BGM), the ball withdrawal performance may be suggested by the timing when the music is changed (for example, the round of the open / close execution mode). Specifically, the BGM may be changed with high probability in a round game corresponding to the game setting value (for example, four rounds when the game setting value is 4) as compared to other round games. In addition, when the game setting value is odd (1 or 3), BGM is changed with high probability in the odd round compared to the even round, and the game setting is even (2 or 4) when the game setting is even. The BGM may be changed with high probability in even rounds as compared to rounds. When suggesting the ball withdrawal performance by the change of music (BGM), it is possible to estimate the ball withdrawal performance depending on what round game the round game in which the music change has occurred is. Therefore, the player can estimate the ball withdrawal performance not only by whether the music change output from the speaker 26 occurs, but also by the number of rounds in which the music change occurs. Thereby, even a player who is not interested in the music can be made to pay attention to the music output from the speaker 26, and the symbol display in order to confirm what round the round game in which the music change has occurred is. It is possible to focus attention on the display unit such as the unit 341 as well. As a result, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to visually recognize the round game effect, and it is possible to convey the fun of the round game effect to the player.

  In addition, when suggesting withdrawal performance by change of music (BGM), we think that it suggests withdrawal performance by both combination of music before change and music after change and timing when music is changed Be

[Other embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the steps similar to the processing procedures will be omitted. The configurations and the processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below can be selected and combined arbitrarily.

Second Embodiment
In the above-described first embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game, the presentation scenario in the opening / closing execution mode based on the opening / closing execution mode presentation scenario selection table including the opening / closing execution mode presentation scenario Described the case where is determined. That is, the case where it depends on the presentation scenario for which it is selected whether or not the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game in the open / close execution mode has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball exceeding the upper limit number ("9" in the present embodiment) is won in the variable winning opening 316 in the round game (when so-called over winning occurs), the round in the open / close execution mode The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that a ball withdrawal performance suggestion image is displayed in the game. Moreover, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination processing (see step S 2503 of FIG. 40) of the jackpot gaming effect determination processing, the opening / closing execution mode effect which does not include the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario The point that the rendering scenario in the open / close execution mode is determined based on the scenario selection table also differs from the first embodiment described above.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 59, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

Command judgment processing
Here, FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, in the command determination process of this embodiment, whether or not the round game end command and the variable winning prize winning command are received in the command determination process in the first embodiment described above. Processing to judge is added.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 55, when the received command is neither a variation pattern command, a big hit game start command nor a round game end command (No at all of steps S2302, S2307 and S2310), the round game end command is It is determined whether it has been received (step S2701). The round game end command is set, for example, at the end of the round game in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 16 and is voiced in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 5.

  When the round game end command is received (step S2701: YES), the MPU 51 sets a round game effect end flag to ON (step S2702). The round game effect end flag is referred to in step S2803 of the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57 described later. If the round game end command has not been received (step S 2701: NO), the process proceeds to step S 2312 in FIG. 56.

<Steps S2703 and S2704>
If the MPU 51 has not received the round game end command (step S 2701: Yes), as shown in FIG. 56, the received command is an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a game setting value change command and a unit jackpot lottery If the command is neither of the number update command (No at any of steps S2313, S2315, S2317 and S2319), it is determined whether or not the variable winning opening winning command has been received (step S2703). The variable winning opening winning command is set in the RAM 412 together with the winning ball command when setting a winning ball command when, for example, a winning is occurring in the variable winning opening 316 in step S1303 in the main processing of FIG. The flag is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG.

  When the MPU 51 receives the variable winning opening winning command (step S2703: YES), the variable winning opening winning flag is set to ON (step S2704), and the command determination process is ended. The variable winning a prize opening winning flag is referred to in step S3001 of the ball display performance suggesting image display processing of FIG. 59 described later.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect process of the present embodiment, the contents of the round game effect start process are different from those in the first embodiment described above. Along with this, in the jackpot gaming effect processing of this embodiment, an out-of-the-basket performance suggestion image display process is added, and a process (step) necessary for executing the round game presentation start processing and the out-of-the-basket performance suggestion image display processing is added ing. Here, FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process executed by the voice lamp control device 5.

<Steps S2801 and S2802>
As shown in FIG. 57, in the jackpot game effect processing of this embodiment, on the condition that the round game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2604: Yes), the round game effect start processing is executed. (Step S2801), the round game in-progress flag is set to on (step S2802). In addition, the details of the round game effect start process will be described later with reference to FIG. The round game in progress flag is a flag indicating that a round game is being executed, and is referred to in step S2803 to determine whether or not to execute the ball out performance indication image display process.

<Steps S2803 and S2804>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game in-progress flag set in step S2802 is on. If the round game in-progress flag is set to ON (step S2803: YES), the MPU 51 executes a pop-out performance suggestion image display process (step S2804), and performs the jackpot game effect process. In the pop-out ball performance suggestion image display process, when it is determined that the pop-up ball performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38, a process for causing the sub-image display block 38 to display the pop-up ball performance suggestion image is executed. Ru. That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to display the ball-out performance suggestion image during execution of the round game, and the ball-out performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38 in the round game. In addition, the details of the output ball performance suggesting image display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2805 to S2807>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines whether the round game effect end flag set to on in step S2702 of the command determination process of FIG. 55 is set to on. When the round game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2805: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game in progress flag to OFF indicating that the round game is being executed (step S2806), and the round is performed. The game effect end flag is set to off (step S2807), and the jackpot game effect process is ended. On the other hand, when the round game end flag is set to OFF (step S2805: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to 2607.

[Round game production start process]
In the round game effect start process executed in step S2801 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. 57, a process for starting a round game effect is executed. Here, FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect start process executed in the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether the suggested image display flag is set to on. The suggestion image display flag is a flag for causing the symbol display portion 341 to display the pop-out ball performance suggestion image in the round game, and is set to ON in step S3008 of the pop-up ball performance suggestion image display process of FIG. . The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2902 when the suggestion image display in-progress flag is set to on (step S2901: Yes), and sets the out-ball-performance suggestion image display flag to off (step S2901). No), the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Steps S2802 and S2803>
When the suggested image display flag is set to ON (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 stores the popped ball performance suggestion image stored in the RAM 512 in step S3007 of the popped ball performance suggested image display process of FIG. 59 described later. The content is read out (step S2902), and the content of the popped ball performance suggestion image is erased from the RAM 512 (step S2903).

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 transmits a round game start command to the display control device 6. The round game start command is a command for causing the symbol display portion 341 to execute an image effect of a round game effect. In addition, when the suggestion image display flag is set to on (step S2901: Yes), the round game start command includes information on the kind-of-ball-out performance suggestion image type. Thereby, in the round game, a pop-up performance suggestion image is displayed.

[Did-ball performance suggestion image display processing]
In the pop-out-performance-indicating image display process executed in step S2804 in the jackpot gaming effect process of FIG. 57, the presence or absence of the display of the pop-up performance suggested image in the opening / closing execution mode and the image type are determined. Here, FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the output ball performance suggesting image display process executed in the jackpot gaming effect process of FIG.

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 59, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether the variable winning opening winning flag set to ON in step S2704 in the command determination process of FIG. 56 is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3002 when the variable winning opening winning flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), and the variable winning opening winning flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No) , The said output ball performance suggestion image display process is complete | finished.

<Steps S3002 and S3003>
When the variable winning opening winning flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the winning counter (step S3002) and sets the variable winning opening winning flag to OFF (step S3003). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of game balls that have won the variable winning opening 316.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter (number of balls entered into the variable winning opening 316) exceeds the upper limit number. Note that the "upper limit number" is set to the same number as the number of winning game balls in which the variable winning opening 316 is closed before the predetermined time (maximum opening time) elapses, and the "upper limit number" 9 ". That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not an over winning has occurred in which gaming balls exceeding the upper limit number enter the variable winning opening 316. Here, when the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S3004: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3005, and when the value of the winning counter does not exceed the upper limit number (step S3004: No) ), And the processing for displaying the performance-indicating performance of the corresponding ball ends.

<Step S3005>
If the value of the winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S3004: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether the round game is the final round in the open / close execution mode (step S3005). If the round game is the final round (step S3005: YES), the MPU 51 ends the ball-out-the-head performance suggestion image display process. That is, when there is an over winning in the final round in the open / close execution mode, the pop-out ball performance suggestion image is not displayed. On the other hand, when the round game is not the final round (step S3005: No), the MPU 51 determines the ball-out performance suggestion image (step S3006) and stores the contents of the ball-out performance suggestion image in the RAM 512 (step S3007) . Then, the MPU 51 sets the flag for displaying the output ball performance flag to ON (step S3008), and ends the processing for displaying the output ball performance image. That is, when an over winning occurs in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode (except for the final round), the MPU 51 sets the flag for displaying the ball performance suggestion image to ON, following the round game in which the over winning occurs. The out-of-the-carriage performance suggestion image is displayed in the round game of.

  By the way, in order to save the number of game balls launched in the interval between the round games in the jackpot game, there is a technique of so-called stop strike in which the launch of the game balls in the interval is stopped. When performing such a stop, the player repeatedly performs launch and launch suspension of the game balls while counting the number of game balls to be won in the variable winning opening 316 in the round game. Therefore, the player looks at the variable winning opening 316 almost without confirming the symbol display portion 341 and the sub image display portion 38 in the round game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the over winning occurs in the round game in the open / close execution mode (except for the final round), a ball withdrawal performance suggestion image is displayed in the next round game of the round game in which the over winning occurred. Be done. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player who does the stop strike to launch an extra game ball for causing the over winning, and to pay attention to the symbol display portion 341 in the round game. In particular, since the player who does the stop strike has a strong tendency to emphasize the ball out performance as a criterion for selecting the gaming machine 10, the over winning is performed in order to make the symbol display portion 341 and the sub image display portion 38 focus. The significance of displaying the performance suggestion image on the sub image display unit 38 (or both the symbol display unit 341 or the sub image display unit 38 and the symbol display unit 341) is significant.

  In addition, when the pop-out performance suggestive effect is executed in the next round game of the round game in which there is an over winning on the variable winning hole 316, the performance suggestive effect is executed in a short time from the over winning. Therefore, it is easy for the player to grasp the timing at which the performance suggestion effect is performed, and it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to confirm the performance suggestion effect.

  In the present embodiment, when there is an over winning in the final round of the open / close execution mode, the pop-out performance suggestion image is not displayed, but when the over winning is in the final round, the pop-out performance suggesting image is displayed in the ending It may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the inconvenience that the pop-out ball performance suggestion effect is not executed when there is an over winning in the final round game.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, in the applicable range, the same design change as the design change in the first embodiment described above is possible.

Third Embodiment
In the first embodiment described above, in the variable game, the character of the ball-out performance suggestion image is selected based on the game setting value suggestion character selection table (see FIG. 36) selected according to the game setting value (FIG. 34) (See steps S2404 and S2405) and the character mode is determined based on the character mode selection table (see FIGS. 37 and 38) selected according to the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number (see FIG. 34). Steps S2407 and S2408)).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the variable game, the game setting value and the rank of the unit jackpot lottery number are each made a point, and the ball-out performance suggestion image is based on the table selected according to the combined point obtained by totaling these points. This is different from the first embodiment described above in that it is determined and the ball-outcome performance suggestion image is displayed on the sub-image display unit 38. In the following, the “summation point” may be described as “summation Pt”, including the reference drawings.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, focusing on the difference from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

[Did-ball performance suggestion image display processing]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for the pop-out performance suggesting image display process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 60, when the variation pattern command is received, if the value of the jackpot lottery counter is “0” (step S2402: Yes), that is, the number of jackpot lottery times is 1000, as shown in FIG. If the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number stored in the RAM 512 are acquired (steps S2404 and S2406), the total points (total Pt) are calculated (step S3101). Specifically, the MPU 51 calculates the summation point by summing the addition point set according to the game setting value and the addition point set according to the unit jackpot lottery number.

  Here, FIG. 61 (A) and FIG. 61 (B) are figures which show an example of the point table used by a ball | bowl performance performance suggestion image display process.

  As shown in FIG. 61A, the setting point table defines addition points in accordance with the game setting value. In the setting point table, when the game setting value is 4, the addition point is 4 points, when the game setting value is 3, the addition point is 3 points, and when the game setting value is 2, the addition point is 2 points, the game setting value When is one, the addition point is one point. That is, the addition point of the game setting value is set higher as the game setting value is higher, and it is indicated that the higher the point is, the higher the ball-out performance is.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the lottery number point table defines additional points according to the unit jackpot lottery number (rank). In the number-of-lots-of-lots point table, if the number of unit big wins is 25 or more (rank S), the number of additional points is 5 points, and if the number of lot wins is 20 or more and less than 25 (rank A), the number of additional points is 4 points If the unit jackpot lottery number is 15 or more and less than 20 (rank B), the additional points are 3 points, and if the unit jackpot lottery number is 10 or more and less than 15 (rank C), the additional points are 2 points and units When the jackpot lottery number is less than 10 times (rank D), the additional points are 1 point. That is, the additional points of the unit jackpot lottery number (rank) are set higher as the unit jackpot lottery number is larger (the higher the rank is), and it is indicated that the higher the points, the higher the ball-outpering performance.

  As described above, in the set point table shown in FIG. 61 (A), the higher the game setting value is, the higher the added points are set, and in the lottery number point table shown in FIG. 61 (B), the larger the unit jackpot lottery number (rank ) Is set higher. Therefore, it is indicated that the higher the combined point using the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number as the index is, the higher the ball-out performance is. That is, the combined point is an index having a correlation with the payout performance of the gaming machine 10. For example, if the game setting value is 1 and the unit jackpot lottery number is 13 times, the addition point of the game setting value is 1 point, and the addition point of the unit jackpot lottery number is 2 points, the combined point is 3 points It becomes (1 point + 2 points), which indicates that the ball out performance is low. In addition, if the game setting value is 3 and the unit jackpot lottery number is 27 times, the combined points become 8 points (3 points + 5 points), indicating that the ball withdrawal performance is high.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery number has reached 1000 when the change start command is received, the summing point is computed, but the timing for computing the summing point is another timing. May be For example, the summation point may be calculated each time a fluctuation start command is received.

<Step S3102>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 selects a character image (summarization point suggestion character image) as a pop-out performance suggestion image suggesting the summation point calculated in step S3101, and the selected character image is displayed on the sub image display unit 38. It is displayed (step S2408). In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery number has reached 1000 times, a pop-out ball performance suggestion image is displayed, but in this ball-out performance suggestion image, the jackpot lottery number has reached 1000 times For example, it may be displayed only in the variable game, may be displayed across a plurality of variable games, or may be continuously displayed in the big hit game, for example.

  Here, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a combined point suggesting character selection table to be referred to in the processing for displaying the performance of the ball with the output performance of the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the summing point suggestion character selection table, when the summing point (sum Pt) is “8” or “9”, “Sum” is most easily selected and the other characters are hard to select. When the summation point (total Pt) is "6" or "7", "Marine" is most likely to be selected, and the other characters are not likely to be selected. When the summation point (total Pt) is “4” or “5”, “warin” is most easily selected, and the other characters are hard to be selected. When the summation point (total Pt) is “2” or “3”, “urin” is most likely to be selected, and the other characters are not likely to be selected.

  Thus, the character "Sam" is easily selected when the summing point (summing Pt) is "8" or "9", and a character that suggests that the summing point (summing Pt) is high (ie, the ball performance is high) “Marin” is easy to be selected when the summation point (total Pt) is “6” or “7”, and that the total score (total Pt) is relatively high (outgoing ball performance is relatively high). “Warin” is easy to be selected when the combined point (total Pt) is “4” or “5”, and the combined point (total Pt) is relatively low "Urin" is easy to be selected when the combined point (total Pt) is "2" or "3", and the combined point (total Pt) Is low (Dump ball performance is low And it has a suggestive character and when).

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, the ball-out performance indication image is determined using a table prepared for each of the two performance information of the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number are respectively pointed to evaluate the ball out performance as a combined point, the ball out performance suggestion image is determined by one table. Therefore, in the present embodiment, compared to the first embodiment described above, the storage capacity of the ROM 511 required to store the table is reduced, and the calculation processing procedure can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, the pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed based on the combined points (dispense performance) in the variation game, but the pop-up performance suggested image based on the combined points (dispense performance) in the big hit game May be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the total points of the additional points based on the game setting value and the additional points based on the unit jackpot lottery number have been used as an index indicating the ball withdrawal performance, but the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number It is also conceivable to set an index correlated to the ball out-performance, based on a combination of two or more performance information other than the combination of and to suggest the ball out-performance based on the index.

  Also, instead of adding the addition points based on the game setting value and the addition points based on the unit jackpot lottery number, these points are subtracted, multiplied or divided, and the index correlated with the ball performance is set Alternatively, it is also possible to set an index correlated to the ball withdrawal performance based on a predetermined equation, and to suggest the ball withdrawal performance based on the obtained indicator.

  In addition, the first performance information such as the game setting value and one performance information of the second performance information other than the first performance information are made into a point, and the ball is ejected based on the index combined with the value indicating the other performance information. It is also conceivable to suggest performance.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, in the applicable range, the same design change as the design change in the first embodiment described above is possible.

  Further, when determining the pop-out ball performance suggestion image in the second embodiment described above, a method of selecting a pop-up ball performance suggestion image (character image) in the pop-up ball performance suggestion image display process in the present embodiment is adopted. You can also.

Fourth Embodiment
In the above-described third embodiment, the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number are each pointed, and these balls are added together based on a table selected based on a combined point (ball out performance). The case where the suggestion image is determined has been described (see steps S3101 and S3102 in FIG. 60).

  On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the third embodiment described above in that it calculates the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 as a payout expected value and suggests performance information based on the payout expected value.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63 and FIG. 64, focusing on the difference from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

[Did-ball performance suggestion image display processing]
Here, FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the out-of-the-box performance suggestion image display process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, when the variation pattern command is received, if the value of the jackpot lottery counter is “0” (step S2402: Yes), that is, the number of jackpot lottery times is 1000, as shown in FIG. When it reaches, the expected value of the output ball is calculated (step S3201).

  As described above, the expected ball withdrawal value is, for example, the number of payout balls expected for the total number of launched gaming balls (total number of out balls) when striking a fixed number of gaming balls (for example, 60,000 balls) It is a ratio of the number of game balls. Expected payout number is 100% when the total number of projected gaming balls (total out ball number) and the expected number of payout balls (disbursed gaming ball number) is 100%, and the expected number of payout balls (disbursed game number When the number of balls is larger than 100%, the number of expected balls (the number of balls to be paid out) is smaller than 100%. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the expected value of the payout exceeds 100%, and the higher the value, the higher the payout performance. On the other hand, it is disadvantageous for the player when the expected value of the payout is less than 100%, and the lower the numerical value, the lower the payout performance.

  Also, the expected number of payouts (payout ball number) is the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variation gaming state (high It can be calculated from the theoretical ratio of probability mode and high frequency support mode) and jackpot gaming state, and the theoretical number of balls in each gaming state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each gaming state is, for example, the game setting value (the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode (refer to FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B)), the distribution ratio of the jackpot type It is calculated based on the unit jackpot lottery number, the feature ratio and the like shown in FIG. 7 (C). Further, the expected number of payouts (the number of paid-out game balls) expected in the normal gaming state is calculated based on, for example, the number of lotteries, the base, and the like. The expected number of payouts (the number of paid out gaming balls) other than the normal gaming state (time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state and jackpot gaming state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of times per first hit, distribution ratio of big hit type 7 (C)), the number of theoretical balls in each jackpot type, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, and the like.

  In addition, the expected value of the output ball may be evaluated as the fulfillment rate for the border line. Here, the borderline is the number of jackpots required for a lending ball per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to make the expected value of the payout 100%, and this borderline is a jackpot lottery probability It is calculated on the assumption that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes the jackpot in the street. That is, the borderline is the number of jackpot lottery numbers per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in which the ball is ± 0 when the jackpot is won according to the theoretical probability. In addition, although various calculation methods of the border line are proposed, for example, the border line can be calculated as the number of lending balls at 1000 yen / (the average number of playing balls in the jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls for 1000 yen is generally 250. Also, the average number of payouts in the jackpot game is the number of payouts per jackpot game per round when the number of round games in the jackpot game is distributed according to the theoretical value. Further, the total probability is an average jackpot winning probability when the high probability mode and the low probability mode are assigned as theoretical values. Then, the fullness rate for the border line is calculated as a ratio between the number of lottery with a unit jackpot and the border line. If the fulfillment rate of this borderline exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous it is for the player, and if it is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous for the player. For example, in the case where the number of lotteries is 18 and the borderline is 20, the fulfillment rate for the borderline is 90%, which is disadvantageous to the player.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 selects a character image (outgoing ball expected value suggesting character image) as a popping ball performance suggesting image indicative of a popping ball expected value calculated in step S3201 and selects the selected character image as a sub-image. It is displayed on the display unit 38 (step S2408).

Here, FIG. 64 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a pop-out ball expected value suggesting character selection table to be referred to in the pop-out ball performance suggested image display processing, and FIG. 64 (B) is an expected value showing a tank of the pop-out ball expected value. It is a figure which shows an example of a rank corresponding | compatible table.
It is.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (A), in the pop-out expected value suggesting character selection table, a pop-out expected value suggesting character type is defined for each of the pop-out expected value ranks according to the expected value suggestive effect selection table. Here, the expected value rank for withdrawal is an index indicating the magnitude of the expected value for withdrawal, and as shown in FIG. 64 (B), “rank S” indicates that the expected value for withdrawal is 115% or more. "Rank A" when expected value of ball is 105% or more and less than 115%, "Rank B" when expected value of ball is 95% or more and less than 105%, expected value of payout is 85% or more and less than 95% In the case of “rank C”, and the case where the expected value of the output ball is less than 85% is defined as “rank D”. In other words, in the expected value rank, the expected value of the output ball is high in the order of "rank S", "rank A", "rank B", "rank C" and "rank D" In order of the player is advantageous.

  Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64 (A), in the pop-out ball expected value suggesting character selection table, when the pop-out ball expected value rank is "rank S", "GOLD lottery lucky" is most easily selected, and another form of lottery Lucky is hard to choose. In the case where the expected value rank for withdrawal is “rank A”, “GOO lottery lucky” is most likely to be selected, and the lottery lucky of other modes is hard to be chosen. If the expected value rank is “rank B”, “normal lottery lucky” is most likely to be selected, and it is difficult to choose any other lottery lucky. In the case where the expected value rank for withdrawal is “rank C”, “BAD lottery lucky” is most likely to be selected, and the lottery lucky of other modes is hard to be selected. In the case where the expected value rank is “rank D”, “BKACK lottery lucky” is the most likely to be selected, and the lottery lucky of other modes is hard to be selected. In addition, "jujube lottery" is distributed only when the expected value rank is "rank S".

  As described above, “Kotobuki lottery” is selected only when the expected value rank for withdrawal is “rank S”, and is an expected value suggestion image for indicating “rank S”. "GOLD lottery lucky" is an outdated ball expected value suggesting image that is easily selected when the expected value rank of the withdrawal ball is "rank S", and indicates that it is "rank S". “GOO lottery lucky” is an outdated ball expected value suggesting image that is easy to be selected when the expected value rank of the extracted ball is “rank A”, and indicates “rank A”. The “normal lottery lucky” is easily selected when the expected value rank is “rank B”, and is an expected value suggestion image suggesting that it is “rank B”. "BAD lottery" is an outdated ball expected value suggesting image which is easily selected in the case where the expected value rank of the withdrawal ball is "rank C", and indicates "rank C". “BLACK lottery lucky” is a payout expected value suggesting image that suggests that it is easy to be selected when the withdrawal expected value rank is “rank D” and is “rank D”.

  By the way, in the above-described third embodiment, the ball-out performance indication image is displayed based on the two pieces of performance information of the game setting value and the unit jackpot lottery number. Therefore, the third embodiment described above has the advantage that the arithmetic processing is simple. On the other hand, the game setting value is an index reflecting the jackpot probability, and there is no correlation with the jackpot type distribution. Also, the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers relates to the magnitude of the number of jackpot lottery numbers in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), and the correlation with the balls in the gaming state other than the normal gaming state is Absent. Therefore, in the third embodiment described above, the number of balls out in the jackpot gaming state (the number of balls), the average number of consecutive bunkerings for the first hit, the number of balls out in the time-saving gaming state or probability variation gaming state (the number of balls) Etc., and although there is an advantage as a simple method, the payout performance of the gaming machine 10 is not properly reflected.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball-out performance is evaluated based on the total ball-out expected value including the game states other than the normal game state, and the ball-out performance is suggested. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest to the player the ball-out performance based on the performance information in which the ball-out performance of the gaming machine 10 is appropriately reflected.

  In the present embodiment, the pop-out performance suggestion image is displayed based on the pop-out expectation value (dispense performance) in the variation game, but the pop-up performance suggestion image is based on the pop out expectation value in the big hit game. It may be displayed.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, in the applicable range, the same design change as the design change in the first embodiment described above is possible.

  Further, when determining the pop-out ball performance suggestion image in the second embodiment described above, a method of selecting a pop-up ball performance suggestion image (character image) in the pop-up ball performance suggestion image display process in the present embodiment is adopted. You can also.

Fifth Embodiment
In the above-described first embodiment, the case in which the sub-image display unit 38 suggests the ball-out performance has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game setting value is displayed in the special main display unit, and the game setting value can be visually recognized by the downward movement of the staying box disposed on the front side of the special main display unit. Is different from the embodiment of FIG.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above.

  Here, FIG. 65 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 66 is a front view showing an enlarged main part of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, on the right side of the symbol display portion 341 on the gaming board 31, the clune device 36 (an example of the sorting device), the staying box 39 (visual restriction means) , A discharge port 319, and a special main display unit 37a (performance information display means).

  67 is a perspective view showing an example of the Kroon apparatus 36, FIG. 68 (A) is a sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. 67, and FIG. 68 (B) is taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the Kroon device 36 distributes the game balls punched out on the right side area of the game board 31 to any one of a normal ball inlet 367 and a special out ball outlet 363 described later. . The clune device 36 is dish-like having a bottom wall 361 and an annular peripheral wall 362 surrounding the bottom wall 361. The bottom wall 361 is circular in a plan view, and has a high bottom portion 361a, a low bottom portion 361b, and a downwardly sloping left portion 361c provided between the high bottom portion 361a and the low bottom portion 361b.

  The high bottom portion 361a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined downward to the right. The high bottom portion 361a is provided with a special out ball passage 364 having a special out ball port 363 (special discharge port). The special out ball passage 364 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 361c, and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the central portion of the high bottom portion 361a in the front-rear direction D1. The special out ball passage 364 is for guiding the game ball 99 entering through the special out ball hole 363 to the staying box 39 as described later, and has a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99 Is formed. The gaming ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 363 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, when the game ball 99 entering the special out ball outlet 363 can not be expected to enter the ball or pass through the through gate 317 in the various winning openings 313 to 316, for example, when passing through the special out ball outlet 363, or When introduced into the out ball passage 364, it is treated as an out ball.

  The special out ball hole 363 is the top opening of the special out ball passage 364 and is open at the high bottom portion 361 a. Further, the special out ball port 363 is surrounded by the inhibition wall 365 (inhibition means) protruding upward from the high bottom portion 361a. The inhibition wall 365 inhibits entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 363 to make entry of the game ball difficult, and includes a large inhibition wall 365a and a small inhibition wall 365b.

  The large inhibition wall 365 a is provided on the right half of the periphery of the special out ball port 363. That is, the large inhibition wall 365a is provided at a portion near the peripheral wall 362 and at a distance from the inclined portion 361c, and inhibits entry of the game ball 99 from the right half side of the special out ball port 363. Further, the height dimension of the large inhibition wall 365a is set larger than the radius of the gaming ball 99. Therefore, the game ball 99 can not be expected to enter from the side of the large inhibition wall 365 a for the special out ball outlet 363.

  On the other hand, the small inhibition wall 365 b is provided in the left half of the peripheral part of the special out ball port 363. That is, the small inhibition wall 365 b is provided on the peripheral wall 362 and in a far part near to the inclined portion 361 c, and inhibits entering of the game ball 99 from the left half side of the special out ball port 363. In addition, the height dimension of the small inhibition wall 365b is set smaller than the radius of the gaming ball 99. Therefore, for the special out ball port 363, the small inhibition wall 365b side (special out ball port 363's compared to the game ball 99 from the large inhibition wall 365a side (right half of the special out ball port 363) Entry of the game ball 99 from the left side can be expected.

  The lower bottom portion 361b constitutes a left side portion of the bottom wall 361 and is inclined to be low toward the center. The low bottom portion 361 b is provided with a normal passage 368 having a ball inlet 367. The normal passage 368 is provided to extend in the up-down direction D2 at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 361c except for a portion along the peripheral wall 362 in the lower bottom portion 361b. The normal passage 368 is for guiding the game ball 99 entered through the normal ball entrance 367 to the lower right of the game board 31 and has a semi-cylindrical shape having an opening area larger than that of the special out hole 363. Is formed. Further, at the lower end portion of the normal passage 368, a guiding member 369 for releasing the gaming ball 99 passing through the normal passage 368 from a fixed position is connected. The guide member 369 has a smaller cross-sectional area on the lower side than the upper side, and the lower portion of the guide member 369 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball 99.

  In the clune device 36, the game balls 99 punched out on the right side area of the game board 31 move on the bottom wall 361 along the peripheral wall 362. As a result, the flow-down of the gaming ball 99 is delayed in the lock device 36. Then, most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 361 collide with the peripheral wall 362, the inhibition wall 365, and other game balls 99 of the clone device 36, for example, because the kinetic energy decreases. Normally enter the ball entrance 367. The gaming ball 99 that has entered the ball entrance 367 normally travels the passage 368 and the guiding member 369 and is released from the fixed position. The gaming ball 99 released from the fixed position can enter the second winning opening 315 and the variable winning opening 316 and can pass through the through gate 317.

  On the other hand, a part (for example, 0.01% to 1%) of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 361 is changed in the moving direction usually at the periphery of the ball entrance 367 etc., and collides with other game balls 99 The movement toward the small inhibition wall 365b of the special out ball outlet 363 by the etc., over the small inhibition wall 365b, and enters the special out ball outlet 363. The game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 363 travels through the special out ball passage 364 and is released toward the stagnation box 39.

  In the present embodiment, the special out ball hole 363 is provided in the high bottom portion 361 a of the bottom wall 361, and the opening area of the normal ball inlet 367 is larger than that of the special out ball hole 363, and the special out ball hole 363 is obstructed. The special out ball outlet 363 is usually made difficult to enter the game ball 99 compared to the ball inlet 367 because it is surrounded by the wall 365, but instead of all or a part of them, or In addition, it is also conceivable to make it difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball opening 363 by other means. For example, generating a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 around the special out ball port 363, forming an air curtain by ejecting air around the special out ball port 363, special out It is conceivable to dispose an obstacle (a form different from the inhibition wall 365) that inhibits entry of the ball into the ball 363 and the like.

  Here, FIG. 69 (A) is a front view showing the staying box 39 and its periphery when the staying box 39 is at the upper limit position, FIG. 69 (B) is a longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 69 (A), FIG. Fig. 69 is a cross sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in Fig. 69 (A). 70 (A) is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (B) showing the staying box 39 and its surroundings when the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position, and FIG. 70 (B) shows the staying box 39 in the lower limit position. FIG. 70 (C) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (C) showing the staying box 39 in a certain case and the periphery thereof, and FIG. 70 (C) is a staying box 39 when the staying box 39 is at an intermediate position between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. And FIG. 70 (D) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 69 (C) showing the stay box 39 when the stay box 39 is in the middle position and the periphery thereof. It is.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the staying box 39 receives the gaming ball 99 that has entered the special out ball port 363 of the clune device 36, and keeps the gaming ball 99 inside until the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is made to stay. In the present embodiment, the predetermined condition is that a predetermined time elapses after the staying box 39 is moved downward to the lower limit position (see FIGS. 70A and 70B) described later. The staying box 39 has an upper opening 391 that allows the gaming ball 99 to be received. The retaining box 39 has a front wall 392a, a rear wall 392b, a left side wall 392c, a right side wall 392d and a bottom wall 392e, and these walls 392a to 392e define a retaining space 393 for retaining a certain number of gaming balls 99. It is done. In addition, the staying box 39 is entirely formed to be opaque (for example, black, white), whereby the rear side of the staying box 39 is considered to be invisible or difficult to see.

  The staying box 39 has an upper limit position (see FIG. 69) covering the entire front of the special main display portion 37a and a lower limit position where the whole is positioned lower than the special main display portion 37a (FIGS. 70A and 70). It is movable in the vertical direction D2 between (B) and (B). As shown in FIG. 71, the staying box 39 is driven by a motor 39 a connected to the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the staying box 39 is moved downward by, for example, rotating the motor 39a forward by the MPU 51, and is moved up by rotating the motor 39a reversely by the MPU 51. The motor 39a is, for example, a stepping motor, and the staying box 39 is enabled at a predetermined position by controlling the number of drive pulses input to the motor 39a.

  As shown in FIGS. 70C and 70D, the staying box 39 can stop at a plurality of intermediate positions set between the upper limit position and the lower limit position. When the staying box 39 is located at a plurality of intermediate positions, a part of the special main display 37 a is visible, and the opening 394 of the staying box 39 does not communicate with the outlet 319 of the game board 31. That is, when the staying box 39 is in the middle position, the gaming balls 99 of the staying box 39 stay in the staying box 39 without being discharged to the outside. In the present embodiment, as described later, the staying box 39 can be stopped at three intermediate positions (see FIGS. 73 and 74) corresponding to the downward movement levels 1 to 3. It is possible to determine whether the segment A of the special main display unit 37a is on or off at the middle position of the downward movement level 1, and it is determined that the segments B and F of the special main display unit 37a are on or off at the middle position of the downward movement level 2. In the middle position of the downward movement level 3, it is possible to judge whether the segment G of the special main display portion 37a is on or off. In addition to the positions corresponding to the downward movement levels 1 to 3 or in place of at least one of the positions corresponding to the downward movement levels 1 to 3, for example, of the segments C and E of the special main display unit 37a It may be set to a position where it can be determined whether the light or the light is off or a position where it can be determined whether the segment D of the special main display unit 37a is lighted or not. And the range which can visually recognize special main display part 37a in each middle position differs, and the range which special main display part 37a can visually recognize becomes large as staying box 39 approaches a lower limit position. Further, the position of the staying box 39 is determined according to the number of gaming balls staying in the interior (the number of staying gaming balls), and the lower the number of staying gaming balls, the lower the position (see FIG. 74C). This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74.

  Note that the staying box 39 does not necessarily have to be entirely opaque as long as at least one of the front wall 392a and the rear wall 392b is opaque. Further, the staying box 39 is allowed to have transparency in a range in which the special main display unit 37a is not visible or difficult when in the upper limit position.

  Further, an opening 394 is formed in the lower part of the rear wall 392 b of the stagnation box 39. As shown in FIGS. 70 (C) and 70 (D), the opening 394 communicates with the discharge port 319 penetrating the game board 31 when the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position. Thereby, when the staying box 39 is moved downward to the lower limit position, the gaming balls 99 of the staying box 39 are discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319. Further, the bottom wall 392e of the stagnation box 39 is inclined such that the upper surface thereof becomes lower toward the rear side. Thereby, when the opening 394 and the discharge port 319 are communicated, it is promoted that the game ball 99 of the staying box 39 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the opening 394 and the discharge port 319. Ru.

  Further, a special out ball sensor 35 a is provided on the left side wall 392 c of the staying box 39 in the vicinity of the upper opening 391. The special out ball sensor 35a detects that the gaming ball 99 has entered the staying box 39, and is, for example, a reflective optical sensor. Of course, as the special out ball sensor 35a, other types of known sensors such as a transmission type optical sensor or an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor can also be used. In addition, the special out ball sensor 35 a may be provided in the special out ball passage 364 of the clone device 36.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the special out ball sensor 35a is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 35a so that the MPU 41 plays the game in the stagnation box 39 It is determined whether the ball 99 has been entered. Further, when the game ball 99 enters the staying box 39, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command, and this special out ball detection command is voiced in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Transmit to the lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 controls the motor 39a to execute the stay box lowering process for moving the stay box 39 downward (FIGS. 76 and 77). reference). Further, when the staying box 39 is moved to the lower limit position, the MPU 51 returns the staying box 39 to the upper limit position after the elapse of a predetermined time. Details of this point will be described later in the staying box return processing of FIG.

  The special out ball sensor 35 a may be connected to the sound lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the sound lamp control device 5 moves the staying box based on the output from the special out ball sensor 35a.

  Here, FIG. 72A is a front view showing an example of the special main display portion 37a, and FIG. 72B is a view showing a display example of the special main display portion 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 72 (A), the special main display unit 37a is constituted by a so-called 7-segment display, and consists of seven segments A to G and dot points DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be individually turned on and off. As shown in FIG. 72 (B), the special main display unit 37a displays the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4. In the special main display unit 37a, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is read by the MPU 41 in the initialization process or activation process executed by turning on the main power supply of the gaming machine 10, and the game setting value The numerical value corresponding to is displayed. Specifically, in the special main display section 37a, when the game setting value is 1, the segments B and C are turned on to display the number 1; when the game setting value is 2, the segment A , B, D, E, and G are displayed, and the number 2 is displayed. When the game setting value is 3, the segments A to D and G are displayed, and the number 3 is displayed. When the set value is 4, segments B, C, F and G are turned on to display the number 4; when the game set value is 5, segments A, C, D, F and G are turned on As a result, the numeral 5 is displayed, and when the game setting value is 6, the segments A and C to G are turned on to display the numeral 6.

  In the special main display unit 37a, after the game setting value is displayed in the initialization process or the activation process, the game setting value is continuously displayed until the main power is turned off. When the game setting value is changed, the special main display unit 37a displays the changed game setting value. For example, when displaying the game setting value after the change on the game setting value display unit 45 in step S1709 of the game setting value change process of FIG. 20, it is considered that the game setting value after the change is displayed on the special main display unit 37a. Be Further, the special main display unit 37a may be any display as long as it can display at least the numbers 1 to 6, and may be, for example, a 7-segment display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

  Here, FIGS. 73 (A) to 73 (C), 74 (A) and 74 (B) are diagrams schematically showing the visual condition of the special main display portion 37a at each downward movement level. In these figures, only a portion of the staying box 39 located in front of the special main display portion 37a is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the downward movement level of the staying box 39 is five stages of downward movement levels 0 to 4. In addition, as the downward movement level of the stagnation box 39 is higher (the number of the downward movement level is larger), the stagnation box 39 is positioned below, and the area in which the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized becomes larger.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), at the downward movement level 0, the staying box 39 is at the upper limit position, and all of the front side of the special main display portion 37a is covered by the staying box 39. The entire display unit 37a can not be viewed. That is, at the downward movement level 0, the game setting value can not be determined at all.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (B), at the downward movement level 1, a part (upper half) of the segment A of the special main display 37a is visible. That is, at the downward movement level 1, the lighting and extinguishing of the segment A can be confirmed. Then, at the downward movement level 1, when segment A is on, it can be determined that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 5 and 6, and if segment A is off, the game setting value is It can be judged that it is either 1 or 4. In other words, at the downward movement level 1, it is possible to determine which of the game setting values 1 and 4 or which of the game setting values are 2, 3, 5 and 6 by turning on or off the segment A .

  As shown in FIG. 73 (C), at the downward movement level 2, the whole of the segment A of the special main display portion 37a is visible, and a part (upper half) of the segments B and F is visible. That is, in the downward movement level 2, in addition to lighting and extinguishing of the segment A, lighting and extinguishing of the segments B and F can be confirmed. Then, at the downward movement level 2, when the segment B is on and the segments A and F are off, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, and if the segments B and F are on and the segment A is off It can be determined that the game setting value is 4. In addition, when segments A and B are on and segment F is off, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 3. When segments A and F are on and segment B is off It can be determined that the game setting value is 5 or 6. In other words, at the downward movement level 2, depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each of the segments A, B and F, the game setting value is 1, the game setting value is 4, or the game setting values are 2 and 3. It is possible to determine which of the game setting values 5 and 6 is.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (A), at the downward movement level 3, all of the segments A, B and F of the special main display 37a are visible, and a part (upper half) of the segment G is visible. is there. That is, in the downward movement level 3, in addition to lighting and extinguishing of the segments A, B and F, lighting and extinguishing of the segment G can be confirmed. Then, at the downward movement level 3, when the segment B is on and the segments A, F and G are off, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1, and the segments B, F and G are on and the segment A is off It can be determined that the game setting value is 4 when it is. In addition, when segments A, B and G are on and segment F is off, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 3, segments A, F and G are on and segment B is off When it is determined that the game setting value is 5 or 6, it can be determined. In other words, at the downward movement level 3, depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the segments A, B, F and G, the game setting value is 1, the game setting value is 4, or the game setting value is 2. It is possible to determine which of 3 and 3 or which of the game setting values 5 and 6 is.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (B), at the downward movement level 5, the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position, and all the seven segments A to G of the special main display portion 37a are visible. That is, at the downward movement level 0, the game setting value can be clearly confirmed.

  Here, FIG. 74 (C) is a view showing the relationship between the number of staying gaming balls of the staying box 39 and the downward movement level of the staying box 39. As shown in FIG. 74 (C), the downward movement level of the staying box 39 is determined in accordance with the number of gaming balls staying in the staying box 39 (the number of staying gaming balls). Specifically, the downward movement level of the staying box 39 is 0 when the staying box 39 is at the upper limit position when the number of staying gaming balls is zero, and is 1 when the number of staying gaming balls is one, When the number of staying gaming balls is 2, it is 2; when the number of staying gaming balls is 3, it is 3; and when the number of staying gaming balls is 4, the staying box 39 is 4 at the lower limit position. Note that, as described above, when the staying box 39 is at the lower limit position, the number of staying gaming balls in the staying box 39 is 0 because gaming balls staying in the staying box 39 are discharged to the outside, but in this case The staying box 39 is moved to the upper limit position after a predetermined time after the staying box 39 is moved to the lower limit position.

  Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 when returning from the lower limit position to the lower limit position from the upper limit position to the lower limit position of the staying box 39 will be described with reference to FIGS. Do.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the operation detection process (step S2001) and the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) as in the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) of the first embodiment described above. The counter update process (step S2003), the command determination process (step S3301), the fluctuation game effect process (step S2005), and the jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination process (step S3301) of the present embodiment differs in some steps from the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment described above. Further, in the sub timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, unlike the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 27) of the first embodiment described above, the staying box return process is executed (step S3302).

Command judgment processing
Here, FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. If the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S3401), it is determined whether the received command is a special out ball detection command or not (step S3401). The special out ball detection command is a command set when the special out ball sensor 35a detects that the gaming ball 99 has entered the staying box 39 as described above, and the special out ball detection command is a command in the main process of FIG. It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301.

  If the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S3401: YES), the MPU 51 executes a staying box moving process (step S3402).

[Dwelling box downward movement processing]
In the staying box down movement process, a process is performed in which the staying box 39 is moved down to a position corresponding to a down movement level (see FIG. 74C) corresponding to the number of gaming balls staying in the staying box 39. Here, FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box lowering process performed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 77, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement level counter added in step S3505 described later is zero. Here, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3502, and when the value of the downward movement level counter is not 0 (step S3501: No), the process In step S3504.

<Step S3502>
If the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (step S3501: YES), the MPU 51 sets the staying box return counter to a predetermined value. Here, the staying box return counter is a counter for determining the timing of returning to the upper limit position corresponding to the downward movement level 0 when the staying box 39 is moved downward, and the staying box return processing in FIG. 78 described later. Are referred to in step S3603 in FIG. In addition, the value of the staying box return counter is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from the start of the downward movement of the staying box 39 to the restoration to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0). Be done.

<Step S3503>
In step S3503, the MPU 51 sets the staying box return standby flag to ON. Here, the staying box return waiting flag is a flag indicating that the returning to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is on standby when the staying box 39 is moved downward, and the staying box shown in FIG. 78 described later. It is referred to in step S3601 in the return process.

<Step S3504>
In step S3504, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the downward movement level counter is four. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the staying box 39 is moved down to the lower limit position, and determines whether the staying box 39 is further moved down. If the value of the downward movement level counter is 4 (step S3504: YES), the MPU 51 ends the staying box downward movement processing, and if the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: NO), the process is performed. It transfers to step S3505.

<Steps S3505 and S3506>
If the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), or if the staying box return waiting flag is turned on (step S3503), the MPU 51 sets the value of the downward movement level counter shown in the position of the staying box 39 to One is added (step S3505), and the staying box 39 is moved downward to a position corresponding to the downward movement level corresponding to the value of the downward movement level counter after the addition (step S3506). That is, the MPU 51 controls the drive pulse to be input to the motor 39a (see FIG. 71) to stay at a position corresponding to the downward movement level one level higher than the downward movement level before receiving the special out ball detection command. Move box 39 down. For example, when the downward movement level is changed from 0 to 1, the staying box 39 is from the upper limit position (see FIG. 73A) covering the entire front of the special main display portion 37a, the special main display portion 37a. Is lowered to a position where the upper half portion of the segment A of the second group is exposed (see FIG. 73 (B)). Also, when the downward movement level is changed from 1 to 2, the staying box 39 is moved downward from the position shown in FIG. 73 (B) to the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73 (C), and the downward movement level is from 2 When it is changed to 3, it is moved downward from the intermediate position shown in FIG. 73 (C) to the position shown in FIG. 74 (A), and when the lower movement level is changed from 3 to 4, FIG. 74 (A) From the intermediate position shown in FIG. 74B to the lower limit position shown in FIG. When the downward movement level is changed from 0 to 1, it can be inferred that the game setting value is any of 2, 3, 5 and 6, when the segment A of the special main display 37a is on, It can be inferred that the game setting value is either 1 or 4 when the segment A is off. Then, when the downward movement level is changed from 1 to 3, the number of inferred game setting values is gradually reduced due to lighting or extinguishing of the segment that becomes visible according to the downward movement level. The set values can be narrowed down gradually. Then, at the downward movement level 4, since all seven segments A to G of the special main display portion 37a are visible, it is possible to recognize the game setting value. Thus, the player gradually infers the game setting value in accordance with the number of special out balls (the number of visible segments of the special main display section 37a), and the more the number of special out balls, the more accurate the estimation. Since it is possible to improve stepwise, it is possible to enjoy the process of guessing game setting values.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a part or all of the game setting values displayed on the special main display portion 37a can be visually recognized by the simple method of moving the staying box 39 downward. The state can be realized.

  In addition, since the staying box 39 is moved down stepwise each time the game ball enters the special out ball hole 363, the viewable area of the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a is gradually expanded. Be done. Thereby, since the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a is gradually clarified, it is possible to guess and enjoy the game setting value until the game setting value can be grasped. Thus, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the game setting value can be grasped, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Dwelling box return processing]
In the staying box return process, a process of returning the staying box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the staying box 39 is lowered to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4). Here, FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 78, in step S3601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the staying box return waiting flag set to ON in step S3505 in the staying box lowering process in FIG. 77 is set to ON. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3602 when the staying box return standby flag is set to ON (step S3601: Yes), and the case when the staying box return standby flag is set to OFF (step S3601: No) , End the staying box return processing.

<Steps S3602 and S3603>
If the staying box return waiting flag is set to ON (step S3601: YES), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the staying box return counter set in step S3504 in the holding box downward moving process of FIG. Step S3602) It is judged whether the value of the staying box return counter after subtraction is 0 or not (step S3603). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the staying box 39 is lowered to the lower limit position. If the value of the staying box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3604, and if the value of the staying box return counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S3603: No) ), End the staying box return processing.

<Steps S3604 to S3606>
When the value of the staying box return counter after subtraction is 0 (step S3603: Yes), the MPU 51 returns the staying box 39 from the lower limit position to the upper limit position by controlling the drive pulse to be input to the motor 39a Step S3604). As a result, since the time during which the entire special main display portion 37a is displayed is restricted to a certain time, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being left for a long time in a visible state. This makes it possible to prevent the player who is not playing the game from grasping the game setting value. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the downward movement level counter to 0 (step S3605), sets the stagnation box return waiting flag to off (step S3606), and ends the stagnation box return processing.

  By the way, in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above, the game setting value is suggested or indicated by the symbol display portion 341 or the sub image display portion 38. However, in the first embodiment described above, the game play is poor because the game setting value is suggested or specified as part of the effect. In particular, in the jackpot game, although the jackpot game effect is executed in the symbol display portion 341 etc., the jackpot game digests the number of round games according to the jackpot type if it deviates from the player who is not interested in the jackpot game effect It is poor in playability.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, at the time of right-handed hitting such as a jackpot game, the game ball 99 stagnates in stages by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball port 363 of the clune device 36 difficult to enter. The box 39 moves downward, and the game setting value displayed on the special main display 37a can be gradually confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the game paying attention to whether the game ball 99 in the clone device 36 enters the special out ball port 363 at the time of the right hitting such as the jackpot game. Further, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363, the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a gradually becomes clear, so the game setting value can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. be able to. Thereby, the motivation of continuing the game can be improved until the game setting value can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the staying box 39 is stepped from the upper limit position to the lower limit position by the ball entry of the gaming ball 99 into the special out ball port 363 of the clune device 36 (detection of the gaming ball 99 in the staying box 39). The staying box 39 may be moved down from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at a stretch by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball port 363. As described above, the game box is entered by entering the game ball into the special out ball hole 363, and from the upper limit position where the game setting value can not be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize, the lower limit position where the entire game setting value can be visually recognized Be moved. Therefore, when the game ball is entered into the special out ball port 363, the game property that the game setting value can be visually recognized immediately is provided, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, the staying box 39 moves downward each time one game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363, but every time a plurality of game balls 99 enter the special out ball port 363, the holding box 39 is staged. You may make it go down at once or at once. Further, the staying area of the staying box 39 is enlarged by moving it downward, but it may be expanded by moving it upward, and may be moved leftward, rightward, diagonally, etc. By doing this, the visual recognition area may be expanded.

  Further, the staying box 39 may be moved downward by the weight of the gaming ball 99 staying in the staying box 39. In this case, for example, it is conceivable to bias the staying box 39 upward by biasing means (visual state control means) such as a coil spring. Then, the staying box 39 can be lowered stepwise according to the number of gaming balls staying inside, and the staying box 39 can be moved upward by discharging the gaming balls of the staying box 39.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the staying box 39 is moved downward upon the game ball 99 punched out on the right side area of the game board 31 entering the special out ball hole 363, and the special main display portion 37a is displayed. The displayed game setting value can be visually recognized, but the staying box 39 is moved in response to the game ball 99 punched out in the left area of the game board 31 entering the special out ball port 363. The game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a may be made visible. In this case, the special main display unit 37a, the crane apparatus 36, the staying box 39 and the like are disposed in the left area or the central area of the game board 31.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the game ball 99 was normally distributed to the ball entrance 367 or the special out ball mouth 363 by the clavne apparatus 36, the distribution apparatus of another structure is also applicable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized in response to the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 363 as a trigger, but other specific conditions The game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a may be made visible by filling the space. Other specific conditions include, for example, that the number of times the jackpot lottery number reaches a predetermined number, that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is continuously deviated a predetermined number of times, that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a predetermined number of jackpots, The total number of the released game balls may be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the predetermined number of balls may be positive, or the predetermined number of negative balls may be negative. When at least a part of the game setting values displayed on the special main display unit 37a is made visible when the exemplified specific condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the player can make at least a part of the game setting values visible. It is possible to anticipate the timing of As a result, the player can expect the timing when the game setting value is displayed, and can proceed with the game while looking forward to the timing, so the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, when making it possible to visually recognize the game setting value displayed on the special main display unit 37a by satisfying other conditions, the opaque plate member is replaced with the front position of the special main display unit 37a instead of the staying box 39. By moving the special main display portion 37a downward and upward, the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a changes between the invisible state or the invisible state and the visible state. You may do so.

  In addition, in the special main display unit 37a, another payout performance of the game setting value may be clearly indicated. For example, the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value in the special main display section 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical value, etc. You may make it express ball | bowl performance based on. In this case, it is conceivable to rank the other out-of-the-box performance into a plurality of ranks (see, for example, FIG. 37 and FIG. 38) and clearly indicate the rank. As described above, in addition to the game setting value, the descent performance other than the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit 37 a as an index indicating the ball performance, the game ball 99 to the special out ball opening 363 When a specific condition such as entering a ball is satisfied, it is possible to estimate or grasp another ball-out performance in addition to the game setting value. As a result, the playability is improved, and it is possible to give motivation to continue playing the game.

  In the present embodiment, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a controlled by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. However, the game setting value is displayed on the display by the sound lamp control device 5. It is also good. As a display in this case, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot matrix display or the like can be adopted. Then, it is also conceivable to display the game setting value stepwise or at once on the display which satisfies the specific condition.

  In the present embodiment, in place of or in addition to the game setting value, other performance information is displayed on the special main display unit 37a, for example, a part or all of the performance information indicating the ball withdrawal performance based on the winning openings 313-316. You may By displaying performance information indicating payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 on the special main display unit 37a, the player can see, for example, between gaming machines due to individual differences at the time of manufacture of the gaming machine 10 or aging. It is possible to estimate or recognize the out-of-the-roll performance in which the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning openings 313 to 316 is reflected. Thus, the player enjoys guessing the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 and enjoys playing the game based on the performance information when the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 can be grasped. An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the machine 10.

  Here, as the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316, unit jackpot lottery number information, base information, continuous role ratio information, role ratio information and the like can be mentioned.

  Since the unit jackpot lottery number is an index showing the ease of jackpot lottery in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and not high frequency support mode), part or all of the unit jackpot lottery number information is special main By being displayed on the display unit 37a, it becomes possible to know the susceptibility of the jackpot lottery. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the unit jackpot lottery number and enjoys, and when the unit jackpot lottery number can be grasped, judges whether or not to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the unit jackpot lottery number An opportunity to

  Since the base information is an index showing the ease of winning in the first winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313, part or all of the base information is displayed on the special main display unit 37a. It becomes possible to know the ease of winning in the winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313. As a result, the player is given the opportunity to guess and enjoy the base and, if the base can be grasped, determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the base.

  The continuous feature ratio information is the frequency (stay ratio of the big hit gaming state) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is to shift to the big hit gaming state, and the ease of winning the variable winning opening 316 (special gaming state) Is an index showing the payout rate of Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous character ratio, so that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state It becomes possible to know the frequency of becoming and the ease of winning on the variable winning hole 316. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the continuous character ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, it is determined whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity to

  The feature ratio information is the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery changes to the jackpot gaming state (stay ratio in the jackpot gaming state), the stay ratio in the high frequency support mode to receive the support of the electric jack 315b, and variable It is an index showing the ease of winning a prize in the winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315 (out-rolling rate in the jackpot gaming state). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the character ratio, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is shifted to the jackpot gaming state It becomes possible to know the frequency of becoming, the staying ratio of the high frequency support mode to receive the support of the motorized role 315b, and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening 316 and the second winning opening 315. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio and enjoys it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

Sixth Embodiment
In the fifth embodiment described above, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a, and the game setting value is made visible by the downward movement of the staying box 39 disposed on the front side of the special main display unit 37a. The case was explained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the translucent monitor is disposed on the front side of the special main display unit where the game setting value is displayed, and the game setting value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor as a whole. This embodiment differs from the fifth embodiment described above in that the visibility of is changed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 79 is a front view showing a clune device of a gaming machine according to this embodiment and an example of the periphery thereof, FIG. 80 is a cross-sectional view along the X4-X4 cutting line of FIG. 79, and FIG. 81 (A) is a special main It is a perspective view showing an example of indicator 37a and translucent monitor 39A.

  As shown in FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the Kroon device 36, the discharge port 319, and the right side of the symbol display portion 341 in the gaming board 31. And a special main display unit 37a. However, in the present embodiment, the staying box 39 in the fifth embodiment described above is not provided, and a translucent monitor 39A (translucent display device) is provided instead of the staying box 39. There is.

  The clune device 36 has the same configuration as the clune device 36 of the fifth embodiment described above, but a guiding member 370 is connected to the special out ball passage 364. The guiding member 370 is for guiding the gaming ball 99 introduced to the special out ball passage 364 to the back side of the gaming board 31, and is also connected to the discharge port 319.

  The translucent monitor 39A has a low visible light transmittance in the entire monitor and a low transmittance state (light blocking state) in which the rear side can not or can not be visually recognized, and the visible light transmittance in the entire monitor is high and the rear side is visible It is possible to change the visible light transmission between possible high transmission states (transparent states). The translucent monitor 39A is brought into the light shielding state by displaying a single color such as black and white. In addition, the translucent monitor 39A can realize a semitransparent state which is a plurality of intermediate visible light transmittances between the light shielding state and the transparent state. The translucent monitor 39A is, for example, a transparent flat display such as an organic EL display or a liquid crystal display capable of realizing a transparent state, and the entire monitor is adjusted by adjusting the application voltage to monitor electrodes and the presence or absence of voltage application to each dot. It is possible to change the visible light transmittance at And as shown to FIG. 81 (A), the translucent monitor 39A is fixedly arrange | positioned in the front of the special main display part 37a. Therefore, by selecting the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A, the display contents of the special main display unit 37a can be selected from the invisible state or the invisible state and the visible state, and further, The degree of visibility (visual level) in the visible state can be adjusted.

  Here, FIG. 81 (B) is a view showing an example of the relationship between the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A and the visual recognition state of the special main display portion 37a. The visibility level is an index indicating the visibility behind the translucent monitor 39A and correlates with the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (B), the visual recognition levels of the translucent monitor 39A are five levels of 0-4. Further, as the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is higher (the number of the visibility level is larger), the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is higher, and the visibility of the special main display portion 37a is higher. Then, at the visual recognition level 0, the visible light transmittance of the light-transmissive monitor 39A is low and the back of the light-transmissive monitor 39A can not be seen, so the display content on the special main display unit 37a can not be checked at all. On the other hand, at the visual recognition level 4, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is high and the background behind the translucent monitor 39A can be completely viewed, so the display content on the special main display 37a can be confirmed without any problem. .

  Here, FIG. 81 (C) is a view showing the relationship between the special out-ball count number and the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor. The special out ball count number is the count number of the game balls 99 entered into the special out ball port 363 of the chrono device 36. The special out ball count number is counted based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 35a, but is cleared to 0 when the count number becomes four.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (C), the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A is determined in accordance with the special out-ball count number counted based on the detection result of the special-out ball sensor 35a. Specifically, the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is 0 when the back of the translucent monitor 39A is invisible or hard to be visually recognized when the special out ball count number is 0, and the special out ball count number is 1 for 1 case, 2 for 2 special out ball counts, 3 for 3 special out ball counts, 4 for 4 special out ball counts The back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible 4.

  In addition, when the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A becomes 4 in which the back of the translucent monitor 39A is completely visible, it is visually recognized without waiting for the next game ball 99 entering the special out ball port 363. A certain time after the level reaches 4, the back of the translucent monitor 39A is made invisible 0 or invisible 0.

  Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 when changing the visual recognition level (visible light transmittance) of the translucent monitor 39A will be described with reference to FIG. 82 to FIG.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing]
Here, FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the sub timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the operation detection process (step S2001) and the operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002) as in the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 75) of the fifth embodiment described above. The counter update process (step S2003), the command determination process (step S3701), the fluctuation game effect process (step S2005), and the jackpot game effect process (step S2006) are executed. However, the command determination process (step S3301) of the present embodiment differs in some steps from the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the fifth embodiment described above. Further, in the sub timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, light blocking control processing is executed instead of the staying box return processing of the sub timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 75) of the fifth embodiment described above (step S3702). ).

Command judgment processing
Here, FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 83, in the command determination process of this embodiment, when the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2301: Yes), the received command is a variation pattern command, a jackpot game start command, and a round game start command. If the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S3801), it is determined whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command set when the special out ball sensor 35a detects that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball port 363, and step S1301 in the main processing of FIG. Is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of

  If the received command is the special out-ball detection command (step S3801: YES), the MPU 51 executes the visual recognition control process (step S3802).

[Visual control process]
In the visual recognition control process, a process of controlling the visible light transmittance of the light-transmissive monitor 39A so as to have a visual recognition level (see FIG. 81C) corresponding to the special out ball count number is executed. Here, FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the visual recognition control process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Steps S3901 and S3902>
As shown in FIG. 84, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter (step S3901), and according to the visual recognition level corresponding to the value of the special out ball counter after the addition, The light transmittance is controlled (step S3902). That is, the MPU 51 adjusts the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visual recognition level one level higher than the visual recognition level before receiving the special out ball detection command by controlling the voltage value etc. applied to the translucent monitor 39A. (See FIG. 81 (B)).

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the special out ball counter is four. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the visible light transmittance of the light-transmissive monitor 39A is the maximum transparency with which the back of the light-transmissive monitor 39A can be completely viewed. When the value of the visual recognition level counter is 4 (step S3903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3904, and when the visual recognition level counter is not 4 (step S3903: No), ends the visual recognition control process. Do.

<Step S3904>
If the value of the visual recognition level counter is 4 (step S3903: YES), the MPU 51 sets the light blocking start counter to a predetermined value (step S3904). Here, the light shielding start counter can not completely recognize the back of the light transmitting monitor 39A from the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visual recognition level 4 (the transparent state) in which the back of the light transmitting monitor 39A can be completely recognized. It is a counter for determining the timing of changing to the visible light transmittance corresponding to the visibility level 0 (light blocking state) which is difficult to view, and is referred to in step S4003 in the light blocking control process of FIG. The value of the light blocking start counter is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 60 seconds) from when the visibility level of the translucent monitor 39A is 4 to when it is returned to the visibility level 0.

<Step S3905>
In step S3905, the MPU 51 sets the light blocking start standby flag to ON, and ends the visual recognition control process. Here, the light shielding start waiting flag is a flag indicating that the light shielding monitor 39A is on standby for changing the visual recognition level to 0, and is referred to in step S4001 in the light shielding process of FIG. 85 described later. Ru.

[Shading control processing]
In the light blocking control process, a process of setting the visual recognition level to 0 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A has been made 4 is executed. Here, FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of light blocking control processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG.

<Step S4001>
As shown in FIG. 85, in step S4001, the MPU 51 determines whether the light shielding start waiting flag set to on in step S3905 in the visual recognition control process of FIG. 84 described later is set to on. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4002 when the light shielding start waiting flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), and the processing is shifted to step S4002 when the light shielding start waiting flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No) End the stagnation box return process.

<Steps S4002 and S4003>
If the light shielding start waiting flag is set to ON (step S4001: YES), the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the light shielding start counter set in step S3904 in the visual recognition control process of FIG. 84 (step S4002) It is determined whether the value of the light shielding start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the visual recognition level of the translucent monitor 39A is set to 4. If the value of the light shielding start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4004, and if the value of the light shielding start counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S4003: No), The light blocking control process is ended.

<Steps S4004 to S4006>
When the value of the light shielding start counter after subtraction is 0 (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 controls the level of the voltage value applied to the light transmitting monitor 39A and the like to set the light transmitting monitor 39A in the light shielding state. The visible light transmittance corresponding to a certain visual recognition level 0 is set (step S4004). As a result, since the time during which the entire special main display portion 37a is completely viewed is restricted to a certain time, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being left for a long time in a visible state. Then, the MPU 51 sets the value of the special out ball counter to 0 (step S4005), sets the light blocking start waiting flag to off (step S4006), and ends the staying box return processing.

  By the way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described fifth embodiment, the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363 of the clune device 36 which is difficult to enter at the time of right hitting such as a big hit game. The staying box 39 moves downward, and the game setting value displayed on the special main display 37a can be gradually confirmed.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment, the translucent monitor 39A is provided on the front side of the special main display unit in which the game setting value is displayed instead of the staying box 39 in the fifth embodiment described above. Is arranged, and the visibility of the game setting value is changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A as a whole. In addition, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A as a whole is graded by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 363 of the clune device 36, which is difficult to enter at the time of right hitting such as a big hit game. Is changed to Therefore, as in the fifth embodiment described above, it is possible to enjoy the game paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 in the lock device 36 enters the special out ball port 363 at the time of right strike such as a big hit game . Further, when the game ball 99 enters the special out ball port 363, the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a gradually becomes clear, so the game setting value can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. be able to. Thereby, the motivation of continuing the game can be improved until the game setting value can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the visibility level is adjusted by adjusting the visible light transmittance of the entire translucent monitor 39A, but according to the display color of each segment in the special main display unit 37a, It is also conceivable to adjust the visible level by adjusting the display color of the entire translucent monitor 39A.

  It is also conceivable to adjust the visual recognition level stepwise between the light shielding state and the transparent state by partially changing the visible light transmittance of the light transmitting monitor 39A. For example, as shown in FIG. 86 (A) to FIG. 86 (D), the transparent region with high visible light transmittance is stepped from the low visible light transmittance state (light blocking state) of the entire translucent monitor 39A. In the end, the entire translucent monitor 39A can be made transparent.

The example of FIG. 86 (A) is a pattern in which the transparent area increases stepwise from the upper side to the lower side of the translucent monitor 39A, and the example of FIG. 86 (B) is an example of FIG. Contrary to the pattern, the transparent region increases in a stepwise manner from the lower side to the upper side of the translucent monitor 39A. Also, the example of FIG. 86C is a pattern in which the transparent region gradually increases from the right side to the left side of the translucent monitor 39A, and although not shown, the transparent monitor 39A A pattern is also conceivable in which the transparent area gradually increases from the left side to the right side. Also, the example of FIG. 86 (D) is a pattern in which the transparent area is gradually increased from the upper left corner side of the light transmissive monitor 39A toward the lower right corner side diagonally, although not shown. A pattern is also conceivable in which the transparent region increases stepwise from the other corner side of the light-transmissive monitor 39A toward the diagonal corner side.
As described above, even when the transparent area is gradually increased by entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball outlet 363, the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a becomes gradually apparent, In the process, the game setting value can be estimated and enjoyed. Thus, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the game setting value can be grasped, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, by increasing the visible light transmittance as a whole while giving gradation to the visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A, changing the visual recognition level between the light blocking state and the transparent state is also possible. Conceivable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the light transmission monitor 39A is changed from the light shielding state to the transparent state, a plurality of regions set in advance each time a specific condition is satisfied may be made to be transparent regions in a predetermined order. Conceivable. For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), it is conceivable to set the plurality of areas in a portion corresponding to each of the segments A to G in the special main display portion 37a. Specifically, the central portion of each of segments A to G is set as region A to region G which can be made a transparent region, and any one of regions A to G is transparent each time a specific condition is satisfied. It is also conceivable to be able to determine the presence or absence of lighting of each segment by setting it as a region. Here, FIG. 87B is an example in the case where the regions A to G are changed to the transparent region in this order each time a specific condition is satisfied. As described above, by changing the areas A to G as the transmission areas while changing the light transmission monitor 39A from the light shielding state to the transparent state, it is possible to estimate the game setting value in stages.

  In addition, the order which makes area | regions A-G a permeation | transmission area is not limited to the order shown to FIG. 87 (B), What is necessary is just to set suitably, for example, you may determine according to a game setting value, A game setting value It may be determined in accordance with other elements (for example, the payout performance such as a base other than the game setting value) or may be determined by lottery. In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied, not only one of the regions A to G but also two or more regions may be transparent regions. Further, it is not necessary to set all of the regions A to G as the transmission region while changing the light transmission monitor 39A from the light shielding state to the transparent state, and it is also conceivable to set some regions as transmission regions in order. In this case, the order of setting the partial area as the transparent area may be appropriately determined in accordance with the game setting value or the like as in the case described above. Further, the plurality of areas may be set on the front side of portions other than the areas A to G in addition to the areas A to G corresponding to the segments A to G in the special main display portion 37a. In this case, the number of steps until the game setting value can be grasped can be increased, and it is possible to enjoy which one of the area A to the area G and the other areas is regarded as the transparent area when the specific condition is satisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the light transmission monitor 39A is changed stepwise from the light shielding state to the transparent state, but may be changed from the light shielding state to the transparent state at once.

  Also in the present embodiment, the display color of the numerical value corresponding to the game setting value in the special main display unit 37a, the blinking pattern of the numerical value, etc. It is also possible to clearly indicate the ball performance based on at least one winning opening.

Seventh Embodiment
In the fifth embodiment described above, the game setting value is displayed on the special main display unit 37a, and the game setting value is not visible when the staying box 39 disposed on the front side of the special main display unit 37a is at the upper limit position. The case has been described where it is difficult, and part or all of the game setting values can be made visible by lowering the staying box 39 stepwise from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. Further, in the fifth embodiment described above, the case where the staying box 39 is returned to the upper limit position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the downward movement of the staying box 39 is started has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the time of operation check of the staying box executed after turning on the main power and driving of the staying box during the big hit game, a driving abnormality occurs in the staying box arranged on the front side of the special main display unit It is different from the fifth embodiment described above in that abnormality processing is executed when a drive abnormality occurs.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 96, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 88 is an enlarged front view showing the main part of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 89 is a sectional view taken along the X5-X5 cutting line of FIG. 88, and FIG. FIG. 91 is a cross-sectional view of a region including the staying box and the special main display in the gaming machine, corresponding to FIG. 89 in a certain case.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the basic configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment is the same as that of the fifth embodiment described above. The game balls 99 (special out balls) discharged from the special out ball passage 364 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying in the staying box 39. Therefore, a situation where it is not desirable that game balls 99 stay in staying box 39, such as a failure of motor 39a for driving staying box 39, a drive mechanism for transmitting the driving force of motor 39a to staying box 39, etc. In a situation where the staying box 39 may not be lowered to the downward movement level 4 due to a failure, the game balls 99 can be prevented from staying in the staying box 39. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls 99 from overflowing from the staying box 39 or staying in the special out ball passage 364.

  The gaming machine 10 includes a forced discharge member 319B, an upper limit position detection sensor 40A, a lower limit position detection sensor 40B, and a translucent monitor 39A. Further, a notch 319A is provided on the back side of the lower end portion of the special out ball passage 364 of the lone device 36, and a forced discharge port 319C is provided above the special main display portion 37a in the game board 31. The notch 319A and the forced discharge port 319C define a space for discharging the special out ball passage 364 of the clone device 36 to the game board 31. Further, on the back side of the game board 31, there is provided a discharge path 319D for guiding the gaming ball 99 which has passed the forced discharge port 319C to a position detectable by the out ball sensor 35.

  The forced discharge member 319B is movable in the front-rear direction D1 between a standby position (see FIG. 89) and an operation position (see FIG. 90) by drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid. As shown in FIG. 89, in the standby position, the forced discharge member 319B does not exist between the special out ball passage 364 and the staying box 39, and enters the special out ball port 363 of the clone device 36 to carry out the special out ball. The game ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the passage 364 can enter the staying box 39. Normally, the forced ejection member 319B is in the standby position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89, in the operating position, the forced discharge member 319B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the staying box 39, and the gaming ball 99 discharged from the special out ball passage 364 (special out ball ) Can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31, and special out balls are restricted from entering the staying box 39. The forced discharge member 319B is moved to the operation position when there is a drive abnormality of the staying box 39. Then, the game balls 99 whose entry into the staying box 39 is restricted by the forced discharging member 319B are forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the notches 319A and the forced discharging port 319C.

  The forced ejection member 319B is not limited to the configuration movable in the front-rear direction D1, and other configurations can be adopted. For example, the forced ejection member 319B is movable between a closed position for closing the forced ejection port 319C and a closed position for opening the forced ejection port 319C, and the special out ball is disposed when the forced ejection member 319B is in the open position. A configuration is also conceivable which exists between the passage 364 and the stagnation box 39.

  The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are used to detect the position of the staying box 39. The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are, for example, optical sensors such as a reflection sensor and an illuminance sensor, and are connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, the outputs of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B can be motivated by the MPU 51. The upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B may be connected to the input / output I / F 42 of the main control device 4. In this case, the command corresponding to the output from the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, so that the position of the staying box 39 in the voice lamp control device 5 Is grasped.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 (A) to 91 (C), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A is provided above the special main display portion 37a, and when the staying box 39 is at the downward movement level 0, The presence can be detected, and the presence of the staying box 39 can not be detected when the staying box 39 has the downward movement levels 1 to 4. On the other hand, the lower limit position detection sensor 40B is provided below the discharge port 319 and can detect the presence of the staying box 39 when the staying box 39 is at the downward movement level 4 and the staying box 39 is at the downward movement level 0 to 3. In some cases, the presence of the staying box 39 can not be detected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), the upper limit position detection sensor 40A outputs a high level signal (H) at the lower movement level 0 while operating normally. The low level signal (L) is output at the lower movement levels 1 to 4. The lower limit position detection sensor 40B outputs a high level signal (H) in the case of the lower movement level 4 when operating normally, while it outputs a low level signal (in the case of the lower movement levels 0 to 3 ( Output L). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), when the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B operate normally, the output levels of the signals output from these detection sensors 40A and 40B are The combination is HL at the downward movement level 0, LL at the downward movement levels 1 to 3, and LH at the downward movement level 4.

  As shown in FIGS. 88 to 91, the translucent monitor 39A is disposed on the front side of the special main display unit 37a and controls the visibility of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values displayed on the special main display unit 37a. Do. The translucent monitor 39A is the same as the translucent monitor 39A of the sixth embodiment described above, and the visible light transmittance is changed by being controlled by the MPU 51. Thereby, the special main display unit 37a has a high visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A and a state in which the display content can be viewed visually, and a visible light transmittance on the translucent monitor 39A is low and the display content can not be viewed Or visibility is controlled between difficult states. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (C), when the staying box 39 is driven normally, the translucent monitor 39A is in a normal state where the display content on the special main display portion 37a can be viewed. When the driving abnormality occurs in the staying box 39, the display content on the special main display unit 37a is in the invisible or difficult visual restriction state.

  Here, when the staying box 39 is not driven normally, the downward movement level grasped by the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level grasped by the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. It means that there is a difference between them. For example, when the staying box 39 is not moved up and down due to a failure of the motor 39a or the drive mechanism, the staying box 39 is moved up and down but the value of the down movement level counter is different from the detection sensors 40A and 40B. , Corresponds to the case where the staying box 39 is not driven normally. And, in the present embodiment, as described below, the operation check of the staying box by the voice lamp control device 5 during the start-up process and the big hit game executed when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Is executed. In addition, the operation check of the staying box 39 has a demonstration effect in the symbol display section 341 etc. by stopping the launch of the game ball 99 in the gaming machine 10 and after a certain time period, in addition to the start-up process and the big hit game. If it is being executed, such as when a real time clock (RTC) effect is being executed on the symbol display diagram 341 or the like at a predetermined time that has been determined in advance, the timing at which the player does not feel discomfort even if the staying box 39 is moved You may

  In place of the translucent monitor 39A, it may be considered that a number corresponding to the game setting value displayed on the special main display 37a by other means is made invisible or difficult. For example, the special main display unit 37a may be hidden by a movable member different from the stay box 39, and the special main display unit 37a is configured to be movable, and the special main display unit 37a is on the back side of the stay box 39 or the like. The special main display unit 37a may be retracted to an invisible or difficult position by moving it. It is also conceivable to turn off the power of the special main display section 37a so that the game setting value can not be grasped. In addition, in place of the translucent monitor 39A, it is also conceivable to make the special main display portion 37a invisible or difficult by optical action. For example, an optical member such as a light guide member or a diffusion member is disposed on the front side of the special main display portion 37a, and light from a light source is introduced to the optical member to make the special main display portion 37a invisible or difficult. It is also conceivable. Conversely, while turning on the light source and turning on the light from the light source to make the special main display portion 37a visible, the light source is turned off and the special main display portion 37a can not be visible. Or it may be considered difficult.

[Process of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. The processing in the audio lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is basically the same as that in the first embodiment described above, but in the present embodiment, processing for checking the driving state of the staying box 39 is executed. Specifically, for example, when the stay box operation check process is executed in the start-up process executed when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the stay box 39 is moved downward in the stay box downward movement process, When moving up the staying box 39 in the staying box return process, an operation check is performed as to whether the driving state of the staying box 39 is abnormal.

[Dwelling box operation check process]
In the staying box operation check process, on the condition that the upper limit position detecting sensor 40A and the lower limit position detecting sensor 40B are operating normally, it is determined whether the staying box 39 operates normally or not with the upper limit position detecting sensor 40A and the lower limit It is checked using the position detection sensor 40B. That is, the staying box operation check process is performed after the operation check of whether the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B are abnormal. In addition, the operation check of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B blinks a light source for operation check disposed near each of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B, for example. And the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at that time. Here, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box operation check process executed in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

<Steps S4101 to S4105>
As shown in FIG. 93, the MPU 51 moves the staying box 39 to the downward movement level 4 (lower limit position) (step S4101), and returns the staying box 39 to the upper limit position after a predetermined time has elapsed (step S4102: Yes). (Step S4103). Here, to move the staying box 39 to the lower limit position and return it to the upper limit position after a predetermined time, it is possible that the game ball 99 remains in the staying box 39 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. It is because there is sex. That is, for example, when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off during the jackpot game, there is a possibility that the staying box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 0 to 3 with the gaming ball 99 staying in the staying box 39 is there. Therefore, by moving the staying box 39 to the lower limit position and returning it to the upper limit position after a predetermined time, it is possible to achieve a state where the gaming ball 99 is not present inside the staying box 39 and to move the staying box 39 downward. It can be made to stand by at the upper limit position. Further, the predetermined time for stopping the staying box 39 at the lower limit position which is the downward movement level 4 is set to the time required to discharge the gaming balls 99 retained in the staying box 39, for example, in about 2 to 10 seconds is there.

  Then, when the staying box 39 is returned to the downward movement level 0 (step S4103), the value of the downward movement level counter is set to 0 (step S4104), and the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B. The combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is stored as that for the downward movement level 0 (step S4105).

<Steps S4106 to S4109>
Next, the MPU 51 moves the staying box 39 stepwise to the down moving levels 1 to 4 (step S4106) until the staying box 39 is moved down to the down moving level 4 (step S4109: Yes). Each time it moves down, 1 is added to the value of the downward movement level counter (step S4107), and the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is stored at each downward movement level (step S4108).

<Steps S4110 to S4116>
The MPU 51 determines whether the value of the downward movement level counter is all 0 to 4 and the combination of the output levels is a combination when the staying box 39 is operating normally (see FIG. 92B). (Steps S4110 to 4114). Then, when the values of the downward movement level counter are all 0 to 4 and correspond to the combination when the combination of the output levels is operating normally (Yes in all of steps S4110 to 4114), the staying box 39 Is determined to be normally driven, the dwell box 39 is returned to the upper limit position which is the downward movement level 0 (step S4115), and the value of the downward movement level counter is set to 0 (step S4116). End the box operation check process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the downward movement level counter does not correspond to the combination when the combination of the output levels at any of 0 to 4 is operating normally (No at any of steps S4110 to 4114) Since it is determined that the driving state of the staying box 39 is abnormal, error processing is executed (step S4117), and the staying box operation check process is ended. Here, as a cause when there is an abnormality in the driving state of the staying box 39, for example, a motor 39a for moving the staying box 39 up and down, an abnormality of a drive system or a motor 39a or a driving system is normal. There may be a mismatch between the value of the movement level counter and the downward movement level detected by the detection sensors 40A and 40B. The error processing will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

Error Handling
In the error processing, abnormality processing is executed according to the abnormality of the driving state of the staying box 39. Here, FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the error processing executed in the staying box operation check processing of FIG.

<Step S4201>
As shown in FIG. 94, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all the values of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is LH (step S4201). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LH regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter. The MPU 51 detects the detection sensor regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all the downward movement level counter values 0 to 4 is LH (step S4201: Yes). Since it is determined that the drive abnormality that the combination of the outputs of 40A and 40B is always LH and the staying box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position that is the downward movement level 4 and does not move has occurred, the first drive of step S4202 Transfer processing to abnormal processing. On the other hand, when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LH when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4203.

<Step S4202>
The MPU 51 executes the first drive abnormality processing (step S4202) when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all values of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is LH (step S4201: Yes). , End the error processing. Here, when there is a drive abnormality in which the staying box 39 is fixed at the lower limit position which is the downward movement level 4 and does not move, the display content of the special main display portion 37a is always in a visible state. Therefore, in the first drive abnormality processing, the MPU 51 displays the translucent monitor 39A disposed on the front side of the special main display unit 37a from the normal state where the display content on the special main display unit 37a can be visually recognized. The display content in the section 37a is switched to an invisible or difficult view restriction state (see FIG. 92C). As a result, even when the staying box 39 does not move from the lower limit position, which is the downward movement level 4, the visual recognition of the display content (game setting value) on the special main display unit 37a is made impossible or difficult. Therefore, when the staying box 39 does not move at the lower limit position, which is the downward movement level 4, the special main display unit despite the fact that the game ball 99 has not entered the special out ball port 363 of the clune device 36 It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the game setting value because the display contents in 37a can be always visually recognized.

  Further, the MPU 51 may notify that the staying box 39 does not move in the first drive abnormality processing. In this case, for example, an image indicating that the driving abnormality of the staying box 39 is generated is displayed on the symbol display portion 341, and a sound indicating that the driving abnormality of the staying box 39 is generated is output from the speaker 26. Thus, it is conceivable to notify that the driving abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred. Thereby, the game hall side can know that the driving abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred.

  Further, on the condition that there is no abnormality in the elements other than the staying box 39, the game hall side is made to select whether to shift to a waiting state where the player can play a game or disable the game by the player It is also conceivable to do so. For example, the symbol display section 341 displays an image for selecting whether or not to shift to the customer waiting state, in addition to the image showing that the driving abnormality of the staying box 39 is occurring, the upper tray 23 or the like It is conceivable that it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the customer waiting state on the game hall side by the operation button 20 provided in the or the cross key (not shown). Thus, when there is no abnormality other than the driving abnormality of the staying box 39 and there is no problem in executing the game, the determination as to whether or not the player should use the gaming machine 10 may be left to the gaming hall side. It will be possible.

  Then, when the gaming hall side selects the customer waiting state, the technology of the sixth embodiment is applied, and the number of ball entry (number of special out balls) of the game ball 99 to the special out ball port 363 of the clown device 36 is applied. Accordingly, the visibility of the display content of the special main display unit 37a may be changed by selecting the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A. For example, a sensor for detecting the game ball 99 such as a proximity sensor is provided in the vicinity of the forced discharge port 319C, etc., and the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is changed based on the output of this sensor The visibility of 37a may be changed. In this case, even when the staying box 39 does not move at the lower limit position, which is the downward movement level 4, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with the playability capable of estimating or recognizing the game setting value. Also, in place of the translucent monitor 39A, even if it is not possible to visually recognize or make difficult the number corresponding to the game setting value displayed on the special main display portion 37a by other means, the special means by the other means You may make it change the visibility of the main display part 37a.

<Step S4203>
If the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LH when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 (step S4201: No), the MPU 51 determines all of the downward movement level counters 0 to 4 It is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at step H is HL (step S4203). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always HL regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter. The MPU 51 detects the detection sensor regardless of the value of the downward movement level counter when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all of the downward movement level counters 0 to 4 is HL (step S4203: Yes) Since it is determined that the drive abnormality that the combination of the outputs of 40A and 40B is always HL and the staying box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position of the downward movement level 0 and does not move has occurred, the second drive in step S4204. Transfer processing to abnormal processing. On the other hand, when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not HL when the value of the downward movement level counter is any of 0 to 4 (step S4203: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4205.

<Step S4204>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B in all the values of the lower movement level counter is 0 to 4 is HL (step S4203: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the second drive abnormality processing (step S4204) , End the error processing. Here, when there is a drive abnormality in which the staying box 39 is fixed at the lower limit level 0 and the movement does not move at the lower limit level 0, the gaming ball 99 of the staying box 39 is obtained when the gaming ball 99 is introduced into the staying box 39. Can not discharge. Therefore, in the second drive abnormality processing, the MPU 51 moves the forced discharge member 319B from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operation position (see FIG. 90). Thus, the forced discharge member 319 B exists between the special out ball passage 364 and the staying box 39. Therefore, the game ball 99 (special out ball) that enters the special out ball port 363 of the clune device 36 and is discharged from the discharge path 319D in the jackpot game is limited to the ball entering the staying box 39 by the forced discharge member 319B. Be done. The gaming ball 99 whose entry into the staying box 39 is restricted by the forced discharging member 319B is forcibly discharged to the back side of the game board 31 through the forced discharging member 319B, the forced discharging port 319C and the discharging path 319D. . As a result, the game ball 99 entering the special out ball outlet 363 is prevented from entering the staying box 39. As a result, the game balls 99 having a capacity larger than the capacity are prevented from staying in the stay box 39, and the game balls 99 can be prevented from overflowing from the stay box 39. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging. Therefore, even in the case where there is a drive abnormality in which the staying box 39 is fixed at the upper limit position at the downward movement level 0 and does not move, it is possible to execute the game in the gaming machine 10 as normal.

  Further, in the second drive abnormality process, as in the case of the first drive process, it may be notified that the staying box 39 is not moved. Also in this case, as in the case of the first drive processing, it may be possible to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state on the game hall side.

<Step S4205>
When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is neither LH nor HL (No in steps S4201 and S4203), all of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 It is determined whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LL (step S4205). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is always LL regardless of the downward movement levels 0 to 4. When the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B at all of the lower movement levels 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 does not depend on the lower movement levels 0 to 4 for the detection sensors 40A and 40B. Since it is determined that a drive abnormality has occurred in which the combination of outputs is always LL and the staying box 39 is fixed at a position corresponding to any of the lower movement levels 1 to 3 and does not move, the third step S4206 Transfer processing to drive abnormality processing. On the other hand, when the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not LL at any of the downward movement levels 0 to 4 (step S4205: No), the MPU 51 detects the downward movement level and the detection sensor based on the value of the downward movement level counter. Since it is determined that a link abnormality that is different from the downward movement level based on 40A and 40B has occurred, the process proceeds to link abnormality processing in step S4207.

<Step S4206>
If the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is LL (step S4205: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality processing (step S4206). ), End the error processing. Here, when there is a drive abnormality in which the staying box 39 is fixed at a position corresponding to any one of the downward movement levels 1 to 3 and does not move, a part of the display content of the special main display portion 37a can always be viewed When the gaming ball 99 is introduced into the staying box 39, the gaming ball 99 of the staying box 39 can not be discharged. Therefore, in the third drive abnormality process, the MPU 51 executes the same process as the second drive abnormality process in addition to the process similar to the first drive abnormality process. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the translucent monitor 39A disposed on the front side of the special main display unit 37a in the special main display unit 37a from the normal state where the display content on the special main display unit 37a can be viewed. At the same time as the display content is switched to an invisible or difficult view restriction state (see FIG. 92C), the forced ejection member 319B is moved from the standby position (see FIG. 89) to the operation position (see FIG. 90). As a result, even when the staying box 39 does not move at any of the downward movement levels 1 to 3, it is considered impossible or difficult to visually recognize the display content (game setting value) on the special main display unit 37a. Also, in the big hit game, the special out ball 363 of the clune device 36 enters the special ball outlet 363 and forcibly discharges the gaming ball 99 (special out ball) discharged from the discharge path 319 D to the back side of the game board 31. It is possible to prevent the gaming balls from staying.

<Step S4207>
If the combination of the outputs of the detection sensors 40A and 40B when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 to 4 is not LH or HL or not LL (No in all of steps S4201, S4203 and S4205), the MPU 51 is link abnormal The process is executed (step S4207), and the error process is ended. Here, when there is a link abnormality in which the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter is different from the downward movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B (except in the case where the staying box 39 does not move) Box 39 can not operate properly. Therefore, in the link abnormality processing, the MPU 51 moves the staying box 39 to the position of the downward movement level based on the detection result of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. For example, when the combination of the output levels from the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL, the staying box 39 is moved to the upper limit position of the downward movement level 0. Also, when the link between the downward movement level based on the downward movement level counter value and the downward movement level based on the detection results of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is executed, the staying box operation check process is executed again. It is preferable to confirm that the link is consistent. Then, if it is determined that the link is not matched even by the staying box operation check process again, there is a possibility that the staying box 39 can not move to the position of the downward movement level, so that the link abnormality is You may be notified that it does not cancel. Also in this case, it may be possible to select whether to shift to the customer waiting state on the game hall side. In addition, when the link abnormality is not resolved, the third drive abnormality processing may be executed.

  By the way, when changing the visibility of the special main display unit 37a by the vertical movement of the staying box 39, it is assumed that, for example, abnormality in the driving of the staying box 39 occurs due to an abnormality in the motor 39a connected to the staying box 39 or the drive system. Be done. In this case, when the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 0, the gaming balls in the staying box 39 can not be discharged. When the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 4, the game setting value is grasped because all of the special main display portion 37a remains visible. When the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the downward movement levels 1 to 3, not only the part of the special main display portion 37a remains visible but also the gaming balls in the staying box 39 can not be discharged. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, an operation check process is performed to determine whether a drive abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred. Then, when the driving abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred, the abnormality processing according to the position (lowering level) or the like at which the driving of the staying box 39 is stopped is executed. Specifically, when the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 0, the forced discharge member 319B is operated to forcibly discharge the special out ball to the back side of the game board 31. The game ball 99 is prevented from entering the stagnation box 39. In addition, when the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the downward movement level 4, the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is lowered to make the special main display unit 37a invisible or difficult. When the movement of the staying box 39 is stopped at the downward movement levels 1 to 3, the forced discharge member 319B is operated and the visible light transmittance of the translucent monitor 39A is lowered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the gaming balls in the staying box 39 can not be discharged, and it is possible to prevent all or part of the special main display portion 37a from remaining visible. As a result, even in the case where the driving abnormality of the staying box 39 has occurred, execution of the game in the gaming machine 10 becomes possible.

[Dwelling box downward movement processing]
In the staying box downward movement processing of the present embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment described above, at the position corresponding to the downward movement level (see FIG. 74C) according to the number of gaming balls staying in the staying box 39 A process is performed in which the staying box 39 is moved downward. Further, in the present embodiment, before moving down the staying box 39, the matching between the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B is confirmed and the alignment is made. If not, the third drive abnormality process is executed. Here, FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box lowering process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Steps S4301 to S4304>
As shown in FIG. 95, in the staying box downward movement process of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 first acquires a combination of output levels of the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B (step S4301). Then, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 0 (Step S3501: Yes), and the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is not HL (Step S4302: Yes), the above-described error processing is performed. The third drive abnormality process to be executed is executed (step S4303). Further, when the value of the downward movement level counter is not 4 (step S3504: No), that is, when the value of the downward movement level counter is 1 to 3, the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LL. If not (step S4304: YES), the third drive abnormality processing is executed (step S4303). That is, when the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter does not match the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B, the MPU 51 executes the third drive abnormality processing. That is, the reason why the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter does not match the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is simply whether the staying box does not move or not. It is not possible to determine if the stay box 39 is not moving, and it is not possible to determine at which downward movement level the stay box 39 is stopped, so that it is possible to cope with any drive abnormality. Execute error processing.

  The determination of whether the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter matches the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is limited only before the staying box 39 is moved downward. Alternatively, it may be performed after moving down the holding box 39, or may be performed both before and after moving down the holding box 39.

[Dwelling box return processing]
In the staying box return processing of the present embodiment, processing for returning the staying box 39 to the upper limit position (downward movement level 0) is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the staying box 39 is moved downward to the lower limit position (downward movement level 4). Be done. Further, in the present embodiment, matching between the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the downward movement level based on the detection sensors 40A and 40B is confirmed before and after the staying box 39 is restored, The third drive abnormality process is executed when the system can not be removed. Here, FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the staying box return process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Steps S4401 to S4404>
As shown in FIG. 96, in the staying box return processing of the present embodiment, the MPU 51 sets the upper limit position detection sensor 40A and the lower limit position detection sensor 40B when it is the return timing of the stay box 39 (Yes in steps S3601 and S3603). A combination of output levels is acquired (step S4401). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is LH (step S4402). That is, just before returning the staying box 39 from the downward movement level 4 to the downward movement level 0, the MPU 51 lowers based on the combination of the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B. Determine if the movement level is consistent. Further, when the staying box 39 is returned to the downward movement level 0 (step S3604), the MPU 51 determines whether the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is HL (step S4403). Then, the MPU 51 lowers the movement based on the combination of the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter and the output level of the detection sensors 40A and 40B immediately after the residence box 39 is restored or immediately after the residence box 39 is restored. If the levels do not match (No in step S4402 or S4403), the third drive abnormality processing is executed (step S4304).

  In addition, it is determined whether the downward movement level based on the value of the downward movement level counter matches the downward movement level based on the combination of the output levels of the detection sensors 40A and 40B is to return the staying box 39 (upward movement) It may be performed only before and after returning the staying box 39 as well as before and after.

  As described above, when the visibility of the special main display unit 37a is changed by the vertical movement of the staying box 39, for example, an abnormality occurs in the driving of the staying box 39 due to an abnormality of the motor 39a connected to the staying box 39 or a drive system. It is assumed. Then, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether there is a drive abnormality in the staying box 39 by an operation check that is executed after the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Even if it is determined that there is no drive abnormality in this operation check, it is assumed that a drive abnormality occurs in the staying box 39 during the game.

  On the other hand, in the embodiment, when the holding box 39 is moved downward during the game, and when the holding box 39 is returned (moved upward), it is determined whether there is a driving abnormality in the holding box 39 and there is a driving abnormality In the case, drive abnormality processing is executed. As a result, the game can be continued even if a drive abnormality occurs in the staying box 39 during the game. In particular, since the staying box 39 is moved up and down in the big hit game, it is significant that the game can be continued when the driving of the staying box 39 is abnormal.

  In the present embodiment, in the applicable range, the same design change as the design change in the fifth embodiment described above is possible.

[Summary of the Invention]
The summary of the invention extracted from the above-described embodiments will be additionally described below. In addition, in order to provide for understanding of the correspondence of each remark and each embodiment, the code etc. may be attached and explained for convenience, but the invention concerning the remark is limited to the concrete composition which attached the code. It is not a thing. Moreover, it is also possible to select and combine arbitrarily each structure and each processing function which are demonstrated below.

[Supplementary Note A1]
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) as an indicator indicating the payout performance;
Performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed;
Performance information display control means (41) for causing the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information;
Visual restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to visually recognize;
A visual recognition state control means (control means (39, 39A) to control at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) when a specific condition is satisfied. 51) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to estimate and enjoy the payout performance of the gaming machine in the game based on the visible part. In addition, when all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be viewed, it is possible to grasp the payout performance of the gaming machine in the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve playability by being able to estimate or grasp the payout performance of the gaming machine in the game, and to give motivation to continue playing the game.

[Supplementary Note A2]
Transition judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of advantage determination probabilities different from one another ,
And further
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) on the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A2, the performance information includes information on the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball withdrawal performance based on the information on the advantage determination probability, it becomes possible to suggest the ball withdrawal performance based on the index on which the ball withdrawal performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player enjoys estimating the advantage determination probability and enjoys it, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the basis of the above.

[Supplementary Note A3]
The game machine further comprises a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a fixed number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on entering of the gaming balls.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A1 or A2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316).

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3 includes performance information indicating a ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player, for example, varies according to individual differences or secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. Thus, it becomes possible to estimate or recognize the out-dump performance which reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening among the gaming machines due to, for example. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout performance based on the winning opening and enjoys it, and if the payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the game continues on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. There is an opportunity to decide what to do.

[Supplementary Note A4]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) when the game ball enters the ball,
The entry of gaming balls into the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a predetermined number of minus balls, or until the number of firing balls of gaming balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls The system further comprises unit determination number operation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination has been made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by a ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determinations calculation unit (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A4, the performance information includes performance information on the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first winning opening until the number of drop balls reaches a predetermined number of minus or the number of launch balls of the game balls reaches a specified number of balls. It is the number of times transition determination is performed. That is, the unit determination number is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize information on the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information on the number of unit determinations, it is possible to know the easiness of the transition determination. Become. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit determinations and enjoys it, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Supplementary Note A5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause the predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is performed by the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving a trigger, and a general winning opening (313) having a function of different from the first winning opening, by causing payout of a specified number of gaming balls based on entering of the gaming ball Including
The number of balls paid out of the game ball for entering the game ball to the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls released of the game ball to the game board (31) and of the game ball for the general winning hole (313) It further comprises a payout rate calculation means (41) for computing a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the number of payout balls with the number of payout balls of the game ball to the ball entry,
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A5, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is a ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning on the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, it is possible for the player to estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the payout rate as the performance information, so that the player can win a prize at the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate and enjoys it, and if the payout rate can be grasped, there is an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the payout rate. Granted.

[Supplementary Note A6]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering game balls in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) It further comprises a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of dispensed balls,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A6, the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio. Here, in the total payout number, which is a total number of the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, the continuous character ratio is the payout for the ball entry of the game ball to the variable winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening (rolling out balls in the special game state) Rate). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous character ratio, the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (stay ratio of special game state) and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the continuous character ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, it is determined whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity to

[Supplementary Note A7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and support of the electric role The second winning opening (315) gives the opportunity for the ball to enter the ball and to trigger the transition judgment by the transition judging means (41) by entering the game ball, and the ball to enter the game ball in the special game state And possible variable winning openings (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) Character ratio calculation means (41) that calculates the character ratio that is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of balls entered into the second winning opening (315) ,
And further
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the performance information includes information on the feature ratio calculated by the feature ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, the performance information includes information on the feature ratio. Here, the character ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls with respect to the entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes, of the game balls to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the ball entry. That is, the property ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric role, It is an index showing the ease of winning (the payout rate in the special game state) to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. Therefore, the player is able to estimate or recognize the item ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the item ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio of special gaming state), stay ratio of support gaming state (short time gaming state) receiving support of electric role, and ease of winning on variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). In this way, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio and enjoys it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Supplementary Note A8]
The visual recognition limiting means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) on the first position (upper limit position) which can not be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize and the performance information display means (37a) Movable between a second position (lower limit position) where the whole of the performance information to be
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition restriction means (39) in a predetermined direction (downward direction) from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes A1 to A7, which is characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be viewed can be realized by a simple method of moving the view restriction means in a predetermined direction.

[Supplementary Note A9]
The visibility limiting means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times,
The visual recognition state control means (51) controls the visual recognition restriction means (39) every time the specific condition is satisfied until the visual recognition restriction means (39) is moved from the first position to the second position. The game machine according to appendix A8, wherein the game machine is moved stepwise in the predetermined direction.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A9, the visual recognition restricting means is moved stepwise in a predetermined direction each time a specific condition is satisfied, so the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually expanded. Ru. Thereby, since the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clear gradually, it is possible to infer and enjoy the performance information until the performance information can be grasped. Thus, the motivation for continuing the game can be improved until the performance information can be grasped, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note A10]
The visual recognition state control means (51) sets the visual recognition restriction means (39) at at least one intermediate position set between the first position and the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. It is possible to stop and
In the intermediate position, part of the performance information can be visually recognized, and two or more of a plurality of contents (for example, game setting values 1 to 6) set as the performance information (for example, game setting values) of the same type The gaming machine according to supplementary note A9, wherein the gaming machine is set in a position where it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between the contents (for example, game setting values 2, 3, 5, and 6) (for example, the middle position of the downward movement level 1).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A10, when the view restriction means is moved in the predetermined direction by satisfying the specific condition, a part of the performance information becomes visible, but it is impossible or difficult to distinguish two or more contents. It is. Therefore, it becomes possible to narrow down and estimate from a plurality of contents until the contents of the performance information can be recognized by satisfying a specific condition. As a result, the player is able to estimate performance information in stages and improve the estimation accuracy in stages, as a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, so estimation of such performance information is possible. You can enjoy the process of

[Supplementary Note A11]
The game according to appendix A8, wherein the visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition restriction means (39) from the first position to the second position when the specific condition is satisfied. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A11, the visual recognition restricting means is moved from the first position where the performance information can not be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize when the specific condition is satisfied, to the second position where the entire performance information can be visually recognized. . Therefore, since the game characteristic that the performance information is immediately visible when the specific condition is satisfied is given, the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note A12]
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) is started from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A8 to A11, which is characterized by

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A12, the visual recognition restricting unit is returned to the first position where the performance information can not be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement is started from the first position. Therefore, since it can prevent that a visual recognition restriction means exists in the position which can visually recognize a part or all of performance information for a long time, it can prevent standing for a long time in the state which can estimate or grasp performance information. This makes it possible to suppress that the player who is not playing a game is guessed or grasped of the performance information.

[Supplementary Note A13]
A game board (31) in which a game area in which game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) which are provided in the gaming area and in which winning balls are paid out by entering the gaming balls,
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls which have not been entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special outlet (363) provided above the gaming area above at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) and for discharging gaming balls to the back side of the gaming board ,
And further
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A12, wherein the specific condition is that a gaming ball is inserted into the special discharge port (363).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A13, the visual recognition restricting means is moved in a predetermined direction by entering the gaming ball into the special discharge port, and the visible area of the performance information is enlarged. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved because it is possible to enjoy the game by focusing not only on the result of the transition determination in the transition determination means but also on whether the game ball is entered into the special outlet.

[Supplementary Note A14]
The visual recognition restricting means (39) can accommodate the gaming ball entered into the special outlet (363), and is accommodated when moved to the second position by the visual recognition state control means (51). The gaming machine according to appendix A13, characterized in that the gaming ball can be discharged.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A14, the gaming ball of the visual recognition restricting means is discharged in response to the visual recognition restricting means being moved to the second position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls of the view limiting means from overflowing.

[Supplementary Note A15]
The at least one winning opening (313 to 316) includes a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering gaming balls in the special game,
A sorting device that distributes the game ball to one of a normal ball entry port (387) for guiding the game ball entered into the variable winning hole (316) to a position where the ball can enter and the special discharge port (363) The game machine according to Supplementary Note A13 or A14, further comprising (36).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A15, in the special game in which the game ball can be entered into the variable winning opening, the sorting device distributes the game ball to the normal entry port and the special outlet. That is, at least in the special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special discharge port that changes the visibility of the performance information. Therefore, since the opportunity to guess or grasp performance information is given in the special game, it is possible to give fun of inferring or grasping the performance information to the special game in which the game tends to progress inorganically.

[Supplementary Note A16]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) when the game ball enters the ball,
In the first winning opening (314), a game ball hit in the left area of the gaming board (31) can be inserted,
In the variable winning hole (316), a game ball hit in the right area of the game board (31) can be entered,
The sorting device (36) sorts the gaming ball fired to the right side area to either the normal ball entrance (387) or the special discharge port (363), as described in the appendix A15. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A16, since the gaming ball fired in the left area of the gaming board can enter the first winning opening, it is necessary to perform a so-called left hit to receive the transition judgment to the special game. There is. On the other hand, since the game ball fired in the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, in the special game, it is necessary to perform a so-called right hit. The sorting apparatus having the special discharge port which can expect change of the visual information of performance information by entering the gaming ball can distribute the gaming ball hit to the right area of the gaming board to the special discharge port. Therefore, in the game for receiving the transition determination to the special game, the visual information of the performance information does not change, and the visual information of the performance information in the special game can change. As described above, since the visual condition of the performance information may change at the time of right-handing such as a special game, the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game for players who are interested in estimating or grasping the performance information. It is possible to give motivation to continue the game until it becomes something.

[Supplementary Note A17]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A13 to A16, wherein the special discharge port (363) is more difficult to enter than the normal ball entrance (387).

[Supplementary Note A18]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A17, wherein the special outlet (363) is provided above the normal ball entry hole (387).

[Supplementary Note A19]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A17 or Appendix A18, wherein the special discharge port (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal ball entry port (387).

[Supplementary Note A20]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A17 to A19, wherein the sorting device (36) has inhibiting means (365) for inhibiting entry of the gaming ball into the special outlet (363). Machine.

[Supplementary Note A21]
The gaming machine according to appendix A20, wherein the inhibition means (365) is a wall surrounding the special outlet (363).

  In the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes A17 to A21, it is difficult to grasp the performance information because it is difficult to enter the gaming balls into the special outlet as compared with the ordinary spherical entrance. Therefore, when the payout performance is low, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, the player can easily grasp that the advantage determination probability is low so that the game in the gaming machine 10 can be canceled early. It can be suppressed.

[Supplementary Note A22]
The visual recognition limiting means (39A) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information on the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the visual recognition state control means (51). The gaming machine described in any one.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A22, the visual recognition state of the performance information display means is changed by the visual recognition restricting means being controlled by the visual recognition state control means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visual condition of the performance information.

[Supplementary Note A23]
The gaming machine according to appendix A22, wherein the visual recognition restricting means (39A) is a translucent display device whose light blocking property can be changed by the control of the visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to the appendix A23, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by lowering the light shielding property of part or all of the translucent display device. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the light shielding property of the translucent display.

[Supplementary Note A24]
The visual recognition state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the performance information display means (37a) displays the performance information from the first state (visual level 0) which can not be visually recognized or difficult to be visually recognized. Changing the visual condition of the performance information to a second state (visual level 4) in which the whole of the performance information displayed in 37a) can be visually recognized,
While the visibility limiting means (39) is changed from the first state to the second state, the visible region in the light transmissive display (39A) is stepped in every time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Appendix A23, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A24, since the transparent area in the translucent display device is gradually expanded each time a specific condition is satisfied, the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually It is expanded. As a result, since the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clear gradually, the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. Thus, the motivation to continue the game can be improved until the performance information can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note A25]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that allow a portion of the performance information to be visible in a predetermined order,
The visual recognition state control means (51) makes it possible to visually recognize part of the performance information in one or more of the plurality of areas each time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in.

[Supplementary Note A26]
The gaming machine according to appendix A25, wherein the plurality of regions are discretely arranged in the translucent display device (39A).

[Supplementary Note A27]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emission possible areas,
The gaming machine according to Appendix A25 or Appendix A26, wherein the plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the plurality of light-emitting areas.

  In the gaming machines according to Appendices A25 to A27, each time a specific condition is satisfied, a part of the performance information is made visible in one or more of the plurality of regions on the translucent display device, so the performance is improved. The performance information displayed on the information display means can be viewed gradually. Thereby, since the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clear gradually, it is possible to infer and enjoy the performance information until the performance information can be grasped. Thus, the motivation to continue the game can be improved until the performance information can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note A28]
The visual recognition state control means (51) can not visually recognize the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) or the translucent display (39A) when the specific condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the whole of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed to a second state (visual level 4) which can be visually recognized from the first state (visual level 0) which is difficult to visually recognize The gaming machine according to appendix A22.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A28, the translucent display device is changed from the light shielding state in which the performance information is not visible or hard to be recognized to the transparent state in which the entire performance information is visible when specific conditions are satisfied. . Therefore, since the game characteristic that the performance information is immediately visible when the specific condition is satisfied is given, the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note A29]
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) is started from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of appendixes A22 to A28, which is characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A29, the visual recognition restricting unit is returned to the first position where the performance information can not be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of movement from the first position. Therefore, since it can prevent that a visual recognition restriction means exists in the position which can visually recognize a part or all of performance information for a long time, it can prevent standing for a long time in the state which can estimate or grasp performance information. This makes it possible to suppress that the player who is not playing a game is guessed or grasped of the performance information.

[Supplementary Note A30]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emission possible areas,
In the performance information display means (37a), the specific performance information is displayed by the emission color or the blinking pattern of the plurality of light emission possible areas when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of A29.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A30, the specific performance information can be simply indicated by the light emission color or the blinking pattern of the light emission possible area of the performance information display means.

[Supplementary Note A31]
It further comprises transition judging means (41) for judging whether to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition.
The specific condition is
The number of times the transition determination has been performed by the transition determining means (41) reaching a predetermined number;
The result of the transition determination is not to be transitioned to the special gaming state continuously a predetermined number of times,
The result of the transition determination with the one to shift to the special gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times,
The total number of game balls fired in the game area of the game board (31) reaches a certain number, or the total number of game balls fired in the game area of the game board (31) and the plurality of winning openings The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A30, characterized in that the number of slipper balls with the total number of paid-out balls by entering the gaming ball into (313 to 316) exceeds a predetermined number.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note A31, since the performance information is displayed on the performance information display means when the specific condition is satisfied, the player may expect the timing when the performance information is displayed on the performance information display means. It will be possible. As a result, the player can expect the timing at which the performance information is displayed, and can advance the game while looking forward to the timing, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note B1]
A game board (31) in which a game area in which game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) which are provided in the gaming area and in which winning balls are paid out by entering the gaming balls,
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls which have not been entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special outlet (363) provided above the gaming area above at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) and discharging the game ball to the back side of the gaming board;
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) as an indicator indicating the payout performance;
Performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed;
Performance information display control means (41) for causing the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information;
Visual restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to visually recognize;
The visibility limiting means (39, 39A) is controlled based on the game ball entering the special discharge port (363), and at least a portion of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) Visual recognition state control means (51) which makes visual recognition possible;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be viewed, the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed based on the visible part. Further, when all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized, the performance information can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to improve playability by being able to estimate or grasp performance information, and to give motivation to continue playing a game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B1, at least a part of the performance information can be viewed by entering the gaming ball into the special outlet. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether the game ball enters the special outlet, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note B2]
Transition judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of advantage determination probabilities different from one another ,
And further
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) on the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B2, the performance information includes information on an advantage determination probability that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball withdrawal performance based on the information on the advantage determination probability, it becomes possible to suggest the ball withdrawal performance based on the index on which the ball withdrawal performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player enjoys estimating the advantage determination probability and enjoys it, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the basis of the above.

[Supplementary Note B3]
The game machine further comprises a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a fixed number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on entering of the gaming balls.
The game machine according to Supplementary Note B1 or Supplementary note B2, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning hole of the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316).

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B3 includes performance information indicating a ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player, for example, varies according to individual differences or secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. Thus, it becomes possible to estimate or recognize the out-dump performance which reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening among the gaming machines due to, for example. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout performance based on the winning opening and enjoys it, and if the payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the game continues on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. There is an opportunity to decide what to do.

[Supplementary Note B4]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) when the game ball enters the ball,
The entry of gaming balls into the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a predetermined number of minus balls, or until the number of firing balls of gaming balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls The system further comprises unit determination number operation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination has been made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by a ball.
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determinations calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B4, the performance information includes performance information on the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first winning opening until the number of drop balls reaches a predetermined number of minus or the number of launch balls of the game balls reaches a specified number of balls. It is the number of times transition determination is performed. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode not being set). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize information on the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information on the number of unit determinations, it is possible to know the easiness of the transition determination. Become. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit determinations and enjoys it, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Supplementary Note B5]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause the predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is performed by the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving a trigger, and a general winning opening (313) having a function of different from the first winning opening, by causing payout of a specified number of gaming balls based on entering of the gaming ball Including
The number of balls paid out of the game ball for entering the game ball to the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls released of the game ball to the game board (31) and of the game ball for the general winning hole (313) It further comprises a payout rate calculation means (41) for computing a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the number of payout balls with the number of payout balls of the game ball to the ball entry,
The gaming machine according to Appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is a ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning on the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, it is possible for the player to estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the payout rate as the performance information, so that the player can win a prize at the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate and enjoys it, and if the payout rate can be grasped, there is an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the payout rate. Granted.

[Supplementary Note B6]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering game balls in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) It further comprises a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of dispensed balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B6, the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio. Here, in the total payout number, which is a total number of the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, the continuous character ratio is the payout for the ball entry of the game ball to the variable winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening (rolling out balls in the special game state) Rate). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous character ratio, the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (stay ratio of special game state) and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the continuous character ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, it is determined whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity to

[Supplementary Note B7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and support of the electric role The second winning opening (315) gives the opportunity for the ball to enter the ball and to trigger the transition judgment by the transition judging means (41) by entering the game ball, and the ball to enter the game ball in the special game state And possible variable winning openings (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) Character ratio calculation means (41) that calculates the character ratio that is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of balls entered into the second winning opening (315) ,
And further
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the performance information includes information on the item ratio calculated by the item ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B7, the performance information includes information on the feature ratio. Here, the character ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls with respect to the entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes, of the game balls to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the ball entry. That is, the property ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric role, It is an index showing the ease of winning (the payout rate in the special game state) to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. Therefore, the player is able to estimate or recognize the item ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the item ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio of special gaming state), stay ratio of support gaming state (short time gaming state) receiving support of electric role, and ease of winning on variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). In this way, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio and enjoys it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Supplementary Note B8]
The at least one winning opening (313 to 316) includes a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering gaming balls in the special game,
A sorting device (36) for sorting the game ball to any one of a normal ball entry port (387) for guiding the game ball to a position where the game ball can enter the variable winning hole (316) and the special outlet (363) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B7, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B8, in the special game in which the game ball can be entered into the variable winning opening, the sorting device distributes the game ball to the normal entry port and the special outlet. That is, at least in the special game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the special discharge port that changes the visibility of the performance information. Therefore, since the opportunity to guess or grasp performance information is given in the special game, it is possible to give fun of inferring or grasping the performance information to the special game in which the game tends to progress inorganically.

[Supplementary Note B9]
It further comprises transition judging means (41) for judging whether to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition.
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) when the game ball enters the ball,
In the first winning opening (314), a game ball hit in the left area of the gaming board (31) can be inserted,
In the variable winning hole (316), a game ball hit in the right area of the game board (31) can be entered,
The distribution device (36) according to appendix B8, characterized in that the game balls fired to the right side area are distributed to either the normal ball entrance (387) or the special discharge port (363). Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note B9, since the gaming ball fired in the left area of the gaming board can enter the first winning opening, it is necessary to perform a so-called left strike in order to receive the transition judgment to the special game. There is. On the other hand, since the game ball fired in the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, in the special game, it is necessary to perform a so-called right hit. The sorting apparatus having the special discharge port which can expect change of the visual information of performance information by entering the gaming ball can distribute the gaming ball hit to the right area of the gaming board to the special discharge port. Therefore, in the game for receiving the transition determination to the special game, the visual information of the performance information does not change, and the visual information of the performance information in the special game can change. As described above, since the visual condition of the performance information may change at the time of right-handing such as a special game, the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game for players who are interested in estimating or grasping the performance information. It is possible to give motivation to continue the game until it becomes something.

[Supplementary Note B10]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B8 or B9, wherein the special discharge port (363) is more difficult to enter than the normal ball entry port (387).

[Supplementary Note B11]
The gaming machine according to appendix B10, wherein the special discharge port (363) is provided above the normal ball entry port (387).

[Supplementary Note B12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B10 or Appendix B11, wherein the special discharge port (363) has an opening area smaller than that of the normal ball entry port (387).

[Supplementary Note B13]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendixes B10 to B12, characterized in that the sorting device (36) has inhibition means (365) for inhibiting entry of the game ball into the special outlet (363). Machine.

[Supplementary Note B14]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B13, wherein the inhibition means (365) is a wall surrounding the special outlet (363).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes B10 to B14, it is difficult to grasp the performance information because it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special outlet as compared with the regular ball entry. Therefore, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, the player can easily grasp that the advantage determination probability is low, so that it is possible to suppress early termination of the game in the gaming machine 10.

[Appendix C1]
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) as an indicator indicating the payout performance;
Performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed;
Performance information display control means (41) for causing the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information;
Visual restriction means (39, 39A) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to visually recognize;
A visual recognition state control means (control means (39, 39A) to control at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) when a specific condition is satisfied. 51) and
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the visual recognition limiting means (39A) changes the visual recognition state of the performance information on the performance information display means (37a) under the control of the visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C1, at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is made visible when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, when a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is visible, it is possible to estimate and enjoy the payout performance of the gaming machine in the game based on the visible part. In addition, when all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be viewed, it is possible to grasp the payout performance of the gaming machine in the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve playability by being able to estimate or grasp the payout performance of the gaming machine in the game, and to give motivation to continue playing the game.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the appendix C1, the visual recognition state of the performance information display means is changed by the visual recognition restricting means being controlled by the visual recognition state control means. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the visual condition of the performance information.

[Appendix C2]
The visual recognition state control means (51)
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the performance information display means (37a) displays the performance information from the first state (visual level 0) which can not be visually recognized or difficult to be visually recognized. Changing the visual condition of the performance information to a second state (visual level 4) in which the whole of the performance information displayed in 37a) can be visually recognized,
While the visibility limiting means (39) is changed from the first state to the second state, the visible region in the light transmissive display (39A) is stepped in every time the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that it is enlarged.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C2, since the transparent area in the translucent display device is gradually expanded each time the specific condition is satisfied, the visible area of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is gradually It is expanded. As a result, since the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clear gradually, the performance information can be estimated and enjoyed in the process. Thus, the motivation to continue the game can be improved until the performance information can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C3]
Appendix C1 or C2. The game machine according to Appendix C1 or Appendix C2, wherein the visual recognition limiting means (39A) is a translucent display device whose light blocking property can be changed by control by the visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C3, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is changed by changing the light shielding property of the translucent display device. For example, the visibility of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is improved by lowering the light shielding property of part or all of the translucent display device. Therefore, it is possible to realize a state in which part or all of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means can be visually recognized by a simple method of changing the light shielding property of the translucent display.

[Appendix C4]
The translucent display device (39A) has a plurality of regions that allow a portion of the performance information to be visible in a predetermined order,
Appendix C3. The visual recognition state control means (51) makes it possible to visually recognize part of the performance information in one or more of the plurality of areas whenever the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in.

[Appendix C5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4, wherein the plurality of regions are discretely arranged in the translucent display device (39A).

[Appendix C6]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emission possible areas,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C4 or Appendix C5, wherein the plurality of areas are provided corresponding to the plurality of light-emitting areas.

  In the gaming machines according to Appendices C4 to C6, each time a specific condition is satisfied, a part of the performance information is made visible in one or more of the plurality of regions on the translucent display device, so the performance is improved. The performance information displayed on the information display means can be viewed gradually. Thereby, since the performance information displayed on the performance information display means becomes clear gradually, it is possible to infer and enjoy the performance information until the performance information can be grasped. Thus, the motivation to continue the game can be improved until the performance information can be confirmed, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The visual recognition state control means (51) can not visually recognize the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) or the translucent display (39A) when the specific condition is satisfied. It is characterized in that the whole of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is changed to a second state (visual level 4) which can be visually recognized from the first state (visual level 0) which is difficult to visually recognize The gaming machine according to appendix C1.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C7, the translucent display device is changed from the light shielding state in which the performance information can not be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize when the specific condition is satisfied to the transparent state in which the entire performance information can be visually recognized . Therefore, since the game characteristic that the performance information is immediately visible when the specific condition is satisfied is given, the interest of the game is improved.

[Supplementary Note C8]
The visual recognition state control means (51) moves the visual recognition restriction means (39) to the first position after a predetermined time has elapsed since the movement of the visual recognition restriction means (39) is started from the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes C1 to C7, which is characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C8, the visual recognition restricting device returns to the first position where the performance information can not be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of movement from the first position. Therefore, since it can prevent that a visual recognition restriction means exists in the position which can visually recognize a part or all of performance information for a long time, it can prevent standing for a long time in the state which can estimate or grasp performance information. This makes it possible to suppress that the player who is not playing a game is guessed or grasped of the performance information.

[Supplementary Note C9]
The performance information display means (37a) has a plurality of light emission possible areas,
The additional performance information is displayed on the performance information display means (37a) according to the light emission color or blinking pattern of the plurality of light emission possible areas when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of C8.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C9, the specific performance information can be simply indicated by the light emission color or the blinking pattern of the light emission possible area of the performance information display means.

[Supplementary Note C10]
Transition judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of advantage determination probabilities different from one another ,
And further
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendixes C1 to C9, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) on the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C10, the performance information includes information on an advantage determination probability that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball withdrawal performance based on the information on the advantage determination probability, it becomes possible to suggest the ball withdrawal performance based on the index on which the ball withdrawal performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player enjoys estimating the advantage determination probability and enjoys it, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the basis of the above.

[Supplementary Note C11]
The game machine further comprises a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a fixed number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on entering of the gaming balls.
The game according to any one of Appendices C1 to C10, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note C11, the gaming machine includes performance information indicating a ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player, for example, varies according to individual differences or secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. Thus, it becomes possible to estimate or recognize the out-dump performance which reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening among the gaming machines due to, for example. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout performance based on the winning opening and enjoys it, and if the payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the game continues on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. There is an opportunity to decide what to do.

[Supplementary Note C12]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) when the game ball enters the ball,
The entry of gaming balls into the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a predetermined number of minus balls, or until the number of firing balls of gaming balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls The system further comprises unit determination number operation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination has been made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by a ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determinations calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C12, the performance information includes performance information on the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first winning opening until the number of drop balls reaches a predetermined number of minus or the number of launch balls of the game balls reaches a specified number of balls. It is the number of times transition determination is performed. That is, the unit determination number is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize information on the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information on the number of unit determinations, it is possible to know the easiness of the transition determination. Become. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit determinations and enjoys it, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Supplementary Note C13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause the predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is performed by the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving a trigger, and a general winning opening (313) having a function of different from the first winning opening, by causing payout of a specified number of gaming balls based on entering of the gaming ball Including
The number of balls paid out of the game ball for entering the game ball to the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls released of the game ball to the game board (31) and of the game ball for the general winning hole (313) It further comprises a payout rate calculation means (41) for computing a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the number of payout balls with the number of payout balls of the game ball to the ball entry,
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C13, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is a ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning on the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, it is possible for the player to estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the payout rate as the performance information, so that the player can win a prize at the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate and enjoys it, and if the payout rate can be grasped, there is an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the payout rate. Granted.

[Supplementary Note C14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering game balls in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) It further comprises a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of dispensed balls,
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C14, the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio. Here, in the total payout number, which is a total number of the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, the continuous character ratio is the payout for the ball entry of the game ball to the variable winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening (rolling out balls in the special game state) Rate). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous character ratio, the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (stay ratio of special game state) and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the continuous character ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, it is determined whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity to

[Supplementary Note C15]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and support of the electric role The second winning opening (315) gives the opportunity for the ball to enter the ball and to trigger the transition judgment by the transition judging means (41) by entering the game ball, and the ball to enter the game ball in the special game state And possible variable winning openings (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) Character ratio calculation means (41) that calculates the character ratio that is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of balls entered into the second winning opening (315) ,
And further
The gaming machine according to Appendix C11, wherein the performance information includes information on the item ratio calculated by the item ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C15, the performance information includes information on the feature ratio. Here, the character ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls with respect to the entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes, of the game balls to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the ball entry. That is, the property ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric role, It is an index showing the ease of winning (the payout rate in the special game state) to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. Therefore, the player is able to estimate or recognize the item ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the item ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio of special gaming state), stay ratio of support gaming state (short time gaming state) receiving support of electric role, and ease of winning on variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). In this way, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio and enjoys it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Supplementary Note D1]
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) as an indicator indicating the payout performance;
Performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed;
Performance information display control means (41) for causing the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information;
Visual restriction means (39) for making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to visually recognize;
A visual recognition state control means (51) which controls the visual recognition limiting means (39) when a specific condition is satisfied, and makes at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible. When,
Abnormality judging means (51) for judging whether a visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is a visual recognition state of the target performance information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Supplementary Note D2]
The apparatus further comprises response processing execution means (51) for executing a response process for the abnormality when the abnormality determination means (51) determines that an abnormality has occurred in the visual condition of the performance information. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2.

  In the gaming machines according to Appendix D1 and Appendix D2, it can be determined whether the visual information of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is the visual information of the target performance information. As a result, it is possible to cope with the case where the visibility state of the performance information is different from the intended one.

[Appendix D3]
The visibility limiting means (39A) is capable of changing the visibility by the control of the visibility state control means (51), and is a forced visibility restriction means (39A) different from the visibility restriction means (39);
Forced viewing state control means (51) for controlling the visibility of the forced viewing restriction means (39A);
And further
The visual recognition limiting means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) on the first position (upper limit position) which can not be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize and the performance information display means (37a) Movable between a second position (lower limit position) where the whole of the performance information to be
The abnormality judging means (51) can judge that the visual recognition restricting means (39) can not move to the second position,
The corresponding processing execution means (51) is the performance information display means (37a) when the abnormality judgment means (51) determines that the visual recognition restriction means (39) can not move to the second position. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, wherein the forcible visual recognition restricting means (39A) is controlled such that visual recognition of the performance information at the second time is difficult or impossible.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3, when the visual recognition restricting means can not move to the second position where the visual performance information can not be visually recognized or difficult in the performance information display means, the performance visual recognition means performs the performance information displaying means It can make the information invisible or difficult. This makes it possible to prevent a state in which part or all of the performance information in the performance information display means can be viewed is maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent some or all of the performance information in the performance information display unit from being visually recognizable and the player from deducing or recognizing the performance information even though the specific condition is not satisfied.

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3, wherein the forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) is capable of changing the visible light transmittance under the control of the forced visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by changing the visible light transmittance of the forced visual recognition state control means. Thus, it is possible to prevent the state in which part or all of the performance information in the performance information display means can be viewed is maintained by the simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D5]
The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) is movable to a position covering the performance information display means (37a) by the control of the forced visual recognition state control means (51). .

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, the visibility of the performance information on the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means to a position covered by the forcible visual recognition state control means. Thus, it is possible to prevent the state in which part or all of the performance information in the performance information display means can be viewed is maintained by the simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D6]
The forced visual recognition limiting means (39A) includes a light source controlled by the forced visual recognition state control means (51), and an optical member capable of diffusing or guiding the incident light upon which light emitted from the light source is incident. The game machine according to appendix D3, comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix D6, the visibility of the performance information in the performance information display means can be changed by turning on or off the light source. Thus, it is possible to prevent the state in which part or all of the performance information in the performance information display means can be viewed is maintained by the simple configuration and control.

[Appendix D7]
The forcible visual recognition state control means (51) is the forcible state when the specific condition is satisfied when the abnormality judgment means (51) determines that an abnormality occurs in the visual performance state of the performance information. Supplementary note D3 to D6, characterized in that the visual recognition limiting means (39A) is controlled to make at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) visible. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D7, it is possible to view at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means by controlling the forced visual recognition limiting means when an abnormality occurs in the visual condition of the performance information. It is assumed. That is, when a drive abnormality or the like of the visibility limiting means occurs, the visibility of the performance information is changed by the forced visibility limiting means instead of the visibility limiting means. Thereby, even if the visibility of the performance information can not be changed by the visibility limiting means, the visibility of the performance information can be changed by the forced visibility limiting means.

[Supplementary Note D8]
The visual recognition limiting means (39) displays the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) on the first position (upper limit position) which can not be visually recognized or difficult to visually recognize and the performance information display means (37a) Movable between a second position (lower limit position) where the whole of the performance information to be
The performance information display means (37a) is movable to a position where it is hidden by the view restriction means (39) when at least the view restriction means (39) is in the second position,
The abnormality judging means (51) can judge that the visual recognition restricting means (39) can not move to the second position,
The corresponding processing execution means (51) is the performance information display means (37a) when the abnormality judgment means (51) determines that the visual recognition restriction means (39) can not move to the second position. The game machine according to Supplementary Note D3, wherein the game machine is moved to a position where it is hidden by the view restriction means (39).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D8, the visibility of the performance information in the performance information display means can be changed by moving the performance information display means. Thus, it is possible to prevent the state in which part or all of the performance information in the performance information display means can be viewed is maintained by the simple configuration and control.

[Supplementary Note D9]
The abnormality determination means (51) includes detection means (40A) capable of detecting that the visual recognition restriction means (39A) is at the second position,
The abnormality judging means (51) is controlled by the detection means (40A) when the visual recognition state control means (51) controls the movement of the visual recognition restricting means (39) to the second position. When any one of (39A) is not detected to be at the second position, the visual recognition restricting means (39) determines that the second position can not be moved to the second position. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D9, it can be determined by the detection means whether the view restriction means can not move to the second position. Thus, it is possible to detect whether or not there is an abnormality in the view restriction means with a simple configuration and control.

[Supplementary Note D10]
The abnormality judging means (51) judges whether or not an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition restricting means (39) from when the main power supply of the game machine is turned on to when the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes D1 to D9, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D10, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the view restriction means from when the main power supply of the gaming machine is turned on until it is possible to start the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game start state from being enabled in a state in which an abnormality occurs in the view restriction means. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the view restriction means, it is possible to cope with the abnormality.

[Supplementary Note D11]
The anomaly judging means (51) judges whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition restricting means (39) after the game start is made possible, according to any one of appendices D1 to D10. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to the addition D11, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the view restriction means after the start of the game. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the view restriction means after the game start is enabled, an abnormality in the view restriction means can be found, and it is possible to cope with the abnormality.

[Supplementary Note D12]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality judging means (51) judges that the visual information of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual information of the target performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D11, further comprising informing means (341, 26) for informing the user of the fact.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D12, it is informed that an abnormality has occurred if the visual information of the performance information is not the purpose. As a result, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the view restriction means, and it becomes possible to cope with the abnormality.

[Supplementary Note D13]
When the abnormality judging means (51) judges that the visual information of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual information of the target performance information, the game is executed The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D12, further comprising selection means (341, 20) capable of selecting whether to enable or not.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note D13, it is possible to select whether or not to enable the execution of the game when the visual condition of the performance information is not the purpose. As a result, when there is no abnormality other than the visual recognition restriction means and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to entrust the determination of whether or not to use the gaming machine to the gaming hall side.

[Supplementary Note D14]
Transition judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of advantage determination probabilities different from one another ,
And further
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendixes D1 to D13, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) on the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note D14, the gaming machine includes information on an advantage determination probability that the performance information greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball withdrawal performance based on the information on the advantage determination probability, it becomes possible to suggest the ball withdrawal performance based on the index on which the ball withdrawal performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player enjoys estimating the advantage determination probability and enjoys it, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the basis of the above.

[Supplementary Note D15]
The game machine further comprises a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a fixed number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on entering of the gaming balls.
The game according to any one of Appendices D1 to D14, wherein the performance information includes information indicating the ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the supplementary note D15, the gaming machine includes performance information indicating a ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player, for example, varies according to individual differences or secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. Thus, it becomes possible to estimate or recognize the out-dump performance which reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening among the gaming machines due to, for example. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout performance based on the winning opening and enjoys it, and if the payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the game continues on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. There is an opportunity to decide what to do.

[Supplementary Note D16]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) when the game ball enters the ball,
The entry of gaming balls into the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a predetermined number of minus balls, or until the number of firing balls of gaming balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls The system further comprises unit determination number operation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination has been made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by a ball.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determinations calculation unit (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D16, the performance information includes performance information on the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first winning opening until the number of drop balls reaches a predetermined number of minus or the number of launch balls of the game balls reaches a specified number of balls. It is the number of times transition determination is performed. That is, the unit determination number is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize information on the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information on the number of unit determinations, it is possible to know the easiness of the transition determination. Become. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit determinations and enjoys it, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Supplementary Note D17]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause the predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is performed by the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving a trigger, and a general winning opening (313) having a function of different from the first winning opening, by causing payout of a specified number of gaming balls based on entering of the gaming ball Including
The number of balls paid out of the game ball for entering the game ball to the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls released of the game ball to the game board (31) and of the game ball for the general winning hole (313) It further comprises a payout rate calculation means (41) for computing a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the number of payout balls with the number of payout balls of the game ball to the ball entry,
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D17, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is a ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning on the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, it is possible for the player to estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the payout rate as the performance information, so that the player can win a prize at the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate and enjoys it, and if the payout rate can be grasped, there is an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the payout rate. Granted.

[Supplementary Note D18]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering game balls in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) It further comprises a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of dispensed balls,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D18, the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio. Here, in the total payout number, which is a total number of the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, the continuous character ratio is the payout for the ball entry of the game ball to the variable winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening (rolling out balls in the special game state) Rate). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous character ratio, the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (stay ratio of special game state) and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the continuous character ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, it is determined whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity to

[Supplementary Note D19]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and support of the electric role The second winning opening (315) gives the opportunity for the ball to enter the ball and to trigger the transition judgment by the transition judging means (41) by entering the game ball, and the ball to enter the game ball in the special game state And possible variable winning openings (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) Character ratio calculation means (41) that calculates the character ratio that is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of balls entered into the second winning opening (315) ,
And further
The gaming machine according to Appendix D15, wherein the performance information includes information on the feature ratio calculated by the feature ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D19, the performance information includes information on the feature ratio. Here, the character ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls with respect to the entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes, of the game balls to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the ball entry. That is, the property ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric role, It is an index showing the ease of winning (the payout rate in the special game state) to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. Therefore, the player is able to estimate or recognize the item ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the item ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio of special gaming state), stay ratio of support gaming state (short time gaming state) receiving support of electric role, and ease of winning on variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). In this way, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio and enjoys it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

[Supplementary Note E1]
A game board (31) in which a game area in which game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) which are provided in the gaming area and in which winning balls are paid out by entering the gaming balls,
A discharge port (318) for discharging game balls which have not been entered into the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A special outlet (363) provided above the gaming area above at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) and for discharging gaming balls to the back side of the gaming board ,
Storage means (412) for storing performance information (game setting value, unit jackpot lottery number, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, etc.) as an indicator indicating the payout performance;
Performance information display means (37a) on which the performance information stored in the storage means (412) is displayed;
Performance information display control means (41) for causing the performance information display means (37a) to display the performance information;
View restriction means (39) capable of accommodating the game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) by making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) invisible or difficult to recognize.
The visual recognition restricting means (39) is controlled on the condition that the gaming ball enters the visual recognition restricting means (39), and at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) Visual recognition state control means (51) which makes visual recognition possible;
Abnormality judging means (51) for judging whether a visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is a visual recognition state of the target performance information;
The first state for allowing the game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) to enter the view restriction means (39), and the above described game ball entered into the special discharge port (363) Switching means (319B) that can be switched between the second state in which entering the ball into the visibility limiting means (39) is limited;
The switching control means (control means) for controlling the switching means (319B) to the second state when it is determined that the visual recognition state of the performance information is not the target visual recognition state by the abnormality judging means (51) 51) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, characterized in that the visual recognition restricting means (39) is capable of discharging the gaming ball accommodated when moved to the second position by the visual recognition state control means (51).

  In the gaming machines according to Appendix E1 and Appendix E2, when it is determined that the visual information of the performance information is not the target visual recognition state, the switching means is switched to the second state to play the game to the visual recognition restriction means Entry of the ball is limited. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience caused by entering the gaming ball into the view limiting means. For example, when the game ball of the view restriction means is discharged in response to the view restriction means being moved to the second position, the view restriction means can not move to the second position where the game ball can be ejected. It is prevented that the game ball enters the restriction means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls having a capacity larger than the capacity from staying in the view restriction means, and to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the view restriction means. Therefore, even when there is a drive abnormality in which the visual recognition restricting means is not moved from the first position, it is possible to execute the game as usual in the gaming machine.

[Supplementary Note E3]
The switching means (319B) has a third position (waiting position) for allowing the game ball entering the special outlet (363) to enter the visual recognition limiting means (39), and the special outlet (363) It is movable between the 4th position (operation position) which restricts the ball into the visibility limiting means (39) of the game ball entered into the ball,
The switching control means (51) is configured to set the switching means (319B) from the third position when it is determined by the abnormality determining means (51) that the visual recognition limiting means (39) is not at the second position. The game machine according to appendix E1 or appendix E2, wherein the game machine is moved to the fourth position.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E3, by moving the switching means from the third position to the fourth position, it is possible to restrict entering of the game ball into the special discharge opening into the view limiting means of the game ball. Thereby, when abnormality is generate | occur | produced in the visual recognition restriction means by the simple structure and control, it is possible to restrict the ball entry of the gaming ball to the visual recognition restriction means.

[Supplementary Note E4]
The abnormality determination means (51) includes detection means (40B) capable of detecting that the visual recognition restriction means (39A) is at the second position,
The abnormality judging means (51) is controlled by the detection means (40B) when the visual recognition state control means (51) controls the movement of the visual recognition restricting means (39) to the second position. The game according to any one of appendices E1 to E3, characterized in that when the presence of (39A) in the second position is not detected, the visual recognition restricting means (39) is judged not to be in the second position. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E4, it can be determined by the detection means that the view restriction means is not at the second position. Thus, it is possible to detect whether or not there is an abnormality in the view restriction means with a simple configuration and control.

[Supplementary Note E5]
The abnormality judging means (51) judges whether or not an abnormality occurs in the visual recognition restricting means (39) from when the main power supply of the game machine is turned on to when the game can be started. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E4, characterized in that

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E5, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the view restriction means from when the main power supply of the gaming machine is turned on to when the game can be started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game start state from being enabled in a state in which an abnormality occurs in the view restriction means. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the view restriction means, it is possible to cope with the abnormality.

[Supplementary Note E6]
The abnormality judging means (51) judges whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the visual recognition restricting means (39) after the start of the game, according to any one of appendices E1 to E5. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E6, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the view restriction means after the start of the game. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the view restriction means after the game start is enabled, an abnormality in the view restriction means can be found, and it is possible to cope with the abnormality.

[Supplementary Note E7]
An abnormality occurs when the abnormality judging means (51) judges that the visual information of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual information of the target performance information. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E6, further comprising informing means (341, 26) for informing the user of the fact.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E7, it is reported that an abnormality has occurred if the visual information of the performance information is not the intended one. As a result, the game hall side can know that an abnormality has occurred in the view restriction means, and it becomes possible to cope with the abnormality.

[Supplementary Note E8]
When the abnormality judging means (51) judges that the visual information of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means (37a) is not the visual information of the target performance information, the game is executed The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E7, further comprising selection means (341, 20) capable of selecting whether to enable or not.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E8, it is possible to select whether or not to enable the execution of the game when the visual condition of the performance information is not the purpose. As a result, when there is no abnormality other than the visual recognition restriction means and there is no problem in executing the game, it is possible to entrust the determination of whether or not to use the gaming machine to the gaming hall side.

[Supplementary Note E9]
Transition judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special gaming state (big hit gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
The advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from among a plurality of advantage determination probabilities different from one another ,
And further
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1 to E8, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) on the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E9, the performance information includes information on an advantage determination probability that greatly affects the payout performance of the gaming machine. Therefore, by evaluating the ball withdrawal performance based on the information on the advantage determination probability, it becomes possible to suggest the ball withdrawal performance based on the index on which the ball withdrawal performance of the gaming machine is more appropriately reflected. Further, by displaying a part or all of the information on the advantage determination probability on the performance information display means, the player enjoys estimating the advantage determination probability and enjoys it, and if the advantage determination probability can be grasped, the advantage determination probability An opportunity is given to determine whether to continue playing the game on the basis of the above.

[Supplementary Note E10]
The game machine further comprises a plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) for paying out a fixed number of gaming balls according to the winning opening type based on entering of the gaming balls.
The game according to any one of Appendices E1 to E9, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings (313 to 316). Machine.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E10 includes performance information indicating a ball withdrawal performance based on at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Therefore, the player can display a part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning opening on the performance information display means, so that the player, for example, varies according to individual differences or secular change at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine. Thus, it becomes possible to estimate or recognize the out-dump performance which reflects the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning opening among the gaming machines due to, for example. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout performance based on the winning opening and enjoys it, and if the payout performance based on the winning opening can be grasped, the game continues on the gaming machine during the game based on the performance information. There is an opportunity to decide what to do.

[Supplementary Note E11]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) when the game ball enters the ball,
The entry of gaming balls into the first winning opening (314) until the number of difference balls reaches a predetermined number of minus balls, or until the number of firing balls of gaming balls to the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls The system further comprises unit determination number operation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations for which the transition determination has been made by the transition determination means (41) triggered by a ball.
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the number of unit determinations calculated by the unit determination number calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E11, the performance information includes the performance information on the number of unit determinations. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first winning opening until the number of drop balls reaches a predetermined number of minus or the number of launch balls of the game balls reaches a specified number of balls. It is the number of times transition determination is performed. That is, the unit determination number is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in the normal gaming state (the low probability mode and not the time saving mode). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize information on the number of unit determinations by displaying a part or all of the information on the number of unit determinations, it is possible to know the easiness of the transition determination. Become. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit determinations and enjoys it, and if the number of unit determinations can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the number of unit determinations. Granted.

[Supplementary Note E12]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause the predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the entry of the game balls, and the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is performed by the entry of the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving a trigger, and a general winning opening (313) having a function of different from the first winning opening, by causing payout of a specified number of gaming balls based on entering of the gaming ball Including
The number of balls paid out of the game ball for entering the game ball to the first winning opening (314) with respect to the number of balls released of the game ball to the game board (31) and of the game ball for the general winning hole (313) It further comprises a payout rate calculation means (41) for computing a payout rate (base) which is a ratio of the number of payout balls with the number of payout balls of the game ball to the ball entry,
The game machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the payout rate calculated by the payout rate calculation means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E12, the performance information includes information on the payout rate. Here, the payout rate is a ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning opening and the general winning opening to the number of fired balls. That is, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning on the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, it is possible for the player to estimate or recognize the payout rate by displaying a part or all of the information on the payout rate as the performance information, so that the player can win a prize at the first winning opening and the general winning opening. It becomes possible to know the ease of doing. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the payout rate and enjoys it, and if the payout rate can be grasped, there is an opportunity to decide whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the payout rate. Granted.

[Supplementary Note E13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering game balls in the special game state,
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) It further comprises a continuous character ratio calculating means (41) for calculating a continuous character ratio which is a ratio occupied by the number of dispensed balls,
The gaming machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio calculated by the continuous character ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E13, the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio. Here, in the total payout number, which is a total number of the number of payout balls of the game ball with respect to the entry of the game ball to the plurality of winning openings, the continuous character ratio is the payout for the ball entry of the game ball to the variable winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the continuous feature ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening (rolling out balls in the special game state) Rate). Therefore, since the player can estimate or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying a part or all of the information on the continuous character ratio, the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game. It becomes possible to know the frequency (stay ratio of special game state) and the ease of winning on the variable winning opening. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the continuous character ratio and enjoys it, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, it is determined whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity to

[Supplementary Note E14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) are played by a first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and support of the electric role The second winning opening (315) gives the opportunity for the ball to enter the ball and to trigger the transition judgment by the transition judging means (41) by entering the game ball, and the ball to enter the game ball in the special game state And possible variable winning openings (316),
With respect to the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of the game balls with respect to the ball entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316), against the ball entry of the game balls to the variable winning hole (316) Character ratio calculation means (41) that calculates the character ratio that is the ratio of the total number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of paid out balls to the number of balls entered into the second winning opening (315) ,
And further
The game machine according to appendix E10, wherein the performance information includes information on the item ratio calculated by the item ratio calculating means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E14, the performance information includes information on the feature ratio. Here, the character ratio is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls for the game balls with respect to the entry of the game balls to the plurality of winning holes, of the game balls to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening It is the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the ball entry. That is, the property ratio is the frequency at which the result of the transition judgment is to shift to the special game (the stay ratio of the special game state), the stay ratio of the support game state (time saving game state) receiving the support of the electric role, It is an index showing the ease of winning (the payout rate in the special game state) to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening. Therefore, the player is able to estimate or recognize the item ratio by displaying a part or all of the information related to the item ratio, and therefore the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is transferred to the special game ( Stay ratio of special gaming state), stay ratio of support gaming state (short time gaming state) receiving support of electric role, and ease of winning on variable winning opening and second winning opening (outgoing in special gaming state) It becomes possible to know the ball rate). In this way, the player enjoys guessing the character ratio and enjoys it, and if the character ratio can be grasped, there is an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game with the gaming machine during the game based on the character ratio. Granted.

10: gaming machine 313: general winning opening 314: first winning opening 315: second winning opening 316: variable winning opening 341: symbol display portion 35a: special out ball sensor 36: ク ロ ー ン device 363: special out ball port 364: special Out ball passage 365: inhibition wall 367: normal entrance 368: normal passage 37a: special main display unit 38: sub image display unit 39: staying box 39A: translucent monitor 319: discharge port 319B: forced discharge member 4: Main controller 40A: upper limit position detection sensor 40B: lower limit position detection sensor 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
412d: gaming information storage area 4A: performance information display device 43: performance display monitor 44: performance display switch 45: gaming setting value display unit 46: setting value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (5)

A game board in which a game area in which game balls flow down is set;
A plurality of winning openings provided in the gaming area, in which winning balls are paid out by entering the gaming balls,
A discharge port that discharges game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning openings to the back side of the game board;
A special outlet provided above the gaming area above at least one winning opening of the plurality of winning openings, for discharging the game balls to the back side of the gaming board;
Storage means for storing performance information that serves as an index indicating the out-dump performance;
Performance information display means for displaying the performance information stored in the storage means;
Performance information display control means for displaying the performance information on the performance information display means;
View restriction means capable of accommodating the game ball entered into the special discharge port, making the performance information displayed on the performance information display means invisible or difficult to visually recognize;
And a visual recognition state control means for controlling the visual recognition restricting means on the condition that the game ball enters the visual recognition restricting means and making at least a part of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means visible. ,
Abnormality judging means for judging whether a visual recognition state of the performance information displayed on the performance information display means is in a visual recognition state of the target performance information;
A first state for permitting entry of the gaming ball entered into the special outlet into the visibility limiting means, and entry of the gaming sphere entered into the special outlet into the visual limitation means is restricted. Switching means capable of switching between the second states
The switching control unit configured to control the switching unit to the second state when it is determined by the abnormality determination unit that the visual recognition state of the performance information is not a target visual recognition state;
A game machine characterized by comprising:   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the visual recognition restricting means is capable of discharging the gaming ball accommodated when the visual recognition state control means has moved to the second position. The switching means is connected to the third position for allowing the game ball entering the special discharge port to enter the view restriction means, and the view restriction means for the game ball entering the special discharge port. It is movable between the 4th position that limits the entry of the ball,
The switching control means is characterized in moving the switching means from the third position to the fourth position when it is judged by the abnormality judging means that the visual recognition restricting means is not at the second position. A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2. The abnormality determination means includes detection means capable of detecting that the visual recognition restriction means is at the second position,
When the abnormality judging means is controlled by the visual recognition state control means to move the visual recognition restricting means to the second position, the detection means does not detect that the visual recognition restricting means is at the second position The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein it is determined that the view restriction means is not at the second position. Transition determination means for determining whether to shift to a special gaming state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition;
Advantage determination probability setting means capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special game state in the transition determination by the transition determination means among a plurality of advantage determination probabilities different from one another;
And further
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the performance information includes information on the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means.

Images